3500 (2018) - Car RAM - Free user manual and instructions

Type de produit	Car
Brand	RAM
Model	3500 (2018)
Engine Options	6.4L HEMI V8 (gasoline) or 6.7L Cummins Turbo Diesel I6
Horsepower	410 hp (gasoline) / 385 hp (diesel)
Torque	429 lb-ft (gasoline) / 930 lb-ft (diesel)
Transmission	8-speed automatic (gasoline) or 6-speed automatic (diesel)
Fuel Type	Gasoline or Diesel
Drivetrain	Rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive
Towing Capacity	Up to 31,000 lbs (diesel)
Payload Capacity	Up to 7,390 lbs
Dimensions (Length)	Approx. 249.9 inches (regular cab long bed)
Dimensions (Width)	Approx. 79.1 inches (without mirrors)
Dimensions (Height)	Approx. 77.9 inches (4WD)
Wheelbase	Approx. 169.0 inches (regular cab long bed)
Curb Weight	Approx. 6,500 – 7,500 lbs (depending on configuration)
Fuel Capacity	31 gallons (standard bed) or 52 gallons (long bed optional)
Maintenance Intervals	Oil change every 7,500-10,000 miles; follow owner's manual
Safety Features	Airbags (front, side, curtain), ABS, stability control, trailer sway control
Cleaning	Wash exterior with mild soap; interior vacuum; avoid harsh chemicals
Spare Parts & Repairability	Parts available at RAM dealerships and aftermarket; service manuals available

Frequently Asked Questions - 3500 (2018) RAM

What is the towing capacity of a 2018 RAM 3500?

The 2018 RAM 3500 can tow up to 31,000 lbs when equipped with the 6.7L Cummins diesel engine and proper hitch.

What engine options are available for the 2018 RAM 3500?

Two engine options: a 6.4L HEMI V8 gasoline engine (410 hp, 429 lb-ft) and a 6.7L Cummins Turbo Diesel I6 (385 hp, 930 lb-ft).

What type of fuel does the 2018 RAM 3500 use?

It depends on the engine: the 6.4L HEMI uses gasoline, while the 6.7L Cummins uses diesel.

How often should I change the oil in my 2018 RAM 3500?

Oil change intervals are typically every 7,500 to 10,000 miles, but always consult your owner's manual for the specific recommendation based on driving conditions.

What is the payload capacity of the 2018 RAM 3500?

Payload capacity varies by configuration, but the maximum is up to 7,390 lbs for certain models.

What transmission does the 2018 RAM 3500 have?

The 6.4L HEMI V8 comes with an 8-speed automatic transmission, while the 6.7L Cummins diesel uses a 6-speed automatic.

Is the 2018 RAM 3500 available with 4-wheel drive?

Yes, both rear-wheel drive (RWD) and 4-wheel drive (4WD) configurations are available.

What safety features are standard on the 2018 RAM 3500?

Standard safety features include airbags (front, side, curtain), ABS, stability control, and trailer sway control.

What is the fuel tank capacity of the 2018 RAM 3500?

The standard fuel tank holds 31 gallons, but an optional 52-gallon tank is available for long bed models.

Where can I find spare parts for my 2018 RAM 3500?

Spare parts are available at RAM dealerships and through many aftermarket suppliers. Service manuals can be purchased or found online for repairs.

USER MANUAL 3500 (2018) RAM

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouare drinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinkingdriver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident. Yourperceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesare slower,andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyou havebeendrinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardorop-tionalonthisvehicle.Thismanualmayalsoincludea descriptionoffeaturesandequipmentthatarenolonger availableorwerenotorderedonthisvehicle.Please disregardanyfeaturesandequipmentdescribedinthis manualthatarenotonthisvehicle.

FCAUSLLCreservestherighttomakechangesindesign andspecifications,and/ormakeadditionstoorimprovementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligation uponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Copyright©2018FCAUSLLC

SECTION PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION....3
2 GRAPHICALTABLEOFCONTENTS. 7
3 GETTINGTOKNOWYOURVEHICLE. 13
4 GETTINGTOKNOWYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL....167
5 SAFETY....207
6 STARTING AND OPERATING....
7 INCASEOFEMERGENCY
8 SERVICINGANDMAINTENANCE. 527
9 TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS. 603
10 MULTIMEDIA
11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE....689
12 I N D E X....

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■INTRODUCTION....4
■HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....5
□Essential Information....5
□Symbols....5

■WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....5
■VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS....6
■VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ..... 6

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner's Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don't overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the "Driving Tips" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.

For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

If applicable, refer to the Owner's Manual Supplement for related information.

NOTE: After reviewing the Owner's Information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to "Warning Lights and Messages" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

6 INTRODUCTION

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the "What Is Not Covered" section of the Warranty Information book. Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builder's Guide refer to www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffect its roadworthinessandsafetyandmay leadtoacollisionresultinginseriousinjuryordeath.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTENTS

■FRONT VIEW....8

■REAR VIEW....9

■INSTRUMENT PANEL....10

■INTERIOR....1 1

8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

0201117886US

FrontView

1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Windshield 5 — Doors
3 — Headlights 6 — Exterior Mirrors

REAR VIEW

Front view line drawing of a pickup truck showing rear wheelbars and side-mounted sensors (no text or symbols)

RearView

0201117896US

1 — Rear Lights 2 — Tailgate Handle

10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL

InstrumentPanel

1 — Air Vents 4 — Instrument Cluster
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Steering Wheel 6 — Radio

INTERIOR

Interior

1 — Door Locks/Window Switches 4 — Radio Controls
2 — Seats 5 — Storage Compartment
3 — Gear Selector

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■KEYS....18

□Key Fobs....18

■IGNITION SWITCH....26

□Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped. . . . 2 6

☐Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped . . . . 2 7

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....28

■REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ..... 2 8

□How To Use Remote Start. 28

□Remote Start Abort Message....28

□To Enter Remote Start Mode....29

□To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle....29

□To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle....29

☐ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .30

□ General Information ....30

■SENTRY KEY....30

□Customer Key Programming....3 1

□Replacement Keys....3 1

□ General Information ....32

■VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM....32

□To Arm The System....3 2

□To Disarm The System....3 3

□ Rearming Of The System .....34

□Security System Manual Override....3 4

■DOORS 34

□Manual Door Locks....34

□Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 3 6

□Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . 3 6

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

□Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . 4 0
□Child-Protection Door Lock....40

■SEATS

□Manual Front Seat Adjustment....42
□Manual Rear Seat Adjustment....4 4
□Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped . . .45
□Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If Equipped....47
□Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 4 8
□Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1
□Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3
□Manual Folding Rear Seats (Mega Cab Models) 5 4
□Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models) 57

■HEAD RESTRAINTS....57

□Front Head Restraint Adjustment....58
□ Rear Head Restraint Adjustment....58

□Front Head Restraint Removal....59
□Rear Head Restraint Removal....59

4 2 STEERING WHEEL....6 0

□ Tilt Steering Column .....60
□ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .61

■DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED....61

■MIRRORS....63

□ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....63
□Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . 6 3
□Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4
□Outside Mirrors....6 5
□Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped. 65
□Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6
□Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

15

□Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . 6 9
□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9
□Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . 7 0
□Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . 7 0

■EXTERIOR LIGHTS....71

□Headlight Switch....7 1
□Headlights....72
□Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped .73
□Multifunction Lever....73
□High/Low Beam Switch....73
□Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped 73
□Flash-To-Pass....74
□Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 7 4
□ Parking Lights And Panel Lights....75
□Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)....75
□Headlight Delay....76

□Lights-On Reminder. 7 6
□Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6
□ Turn Signals .....77
□ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped .....77
□Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped . . . . 7 7
□ Battery Saver....79

■INTERIOR LIGHTS....79

□ Courtesy Lights....79
□Illuminated Approach....8 1

■WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..... 8 2

□Windshield Wipers....82
□Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 8 4

■CLIMATE CONTROLS....85

□Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen . .85
□Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen . . .89
□ Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen. .93
□ Climate Control Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

☐Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped....101

□Operating Tips....101

■WINDOWS....104

□Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Wind Buffeting....107

■POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . 108

□Opening Sunroof....109

□Closing Sunroof....109

□Wind Buffeting....109

□Sunshade Operation....109

□Pinch Protect Feature....1 1 0

□Venting Sunroof — Express ..... 1 1 0

□Sunroof Maintenance....1 1 0

□Ignition Off Operation....1 1 0

■HOOD....111

□To Open The Hood....1 1 1

□To Close The Hood. 1 1 1

■TAILGATE....1 1 2

□Opening....1 1 2

□Closing....1 1 2

■GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 1 1 2

□ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink....113

□ Programming A Rolling Code .....114

□ Programming A Non-Rolling Code. . . . . . . . . . . . .115

□ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....116

□Using HomeLink 118

□Security. 1 1 8

□ Troubleshooting Tips .....118

□General Information....1 1 9

■INTERNAL EQUIPMENT....120

□Storage....120

□Cupholders....131

□Electrical Power Outlets .....132

□Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If Equipped....136

□Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

□Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■PICKUP BOX....138

□Cargo Camera — If Equipped .....139

■RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED .....140

□RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins. . . . . .140

□Locking And Unlocking RamBox....142

□RamBox Safety Warning....143

□Bed Extender — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Bed Rail Tie-Down System....150

■SLIDE-IN CAMPERS....151

□Camper Applications....151

■EASY-OFF TAILGATE....152

□Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .152

□Removing The Tailgate....153

□Locking Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

■TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED....154

□Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal .....155

□ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation....160

□Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning....166

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Key Fobs

Your vehicle uses either a wireless ignition node system or keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and an ignition switch. The keyless ignition system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go button.

NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal.

The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security system.

0301117793US

KeyFobEmergencyKey

This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.

The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. It also contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to disarm the security system.

0301117809US

KeyFobEmergencyKey

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the door lock cylinder with either side up.

The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons for all key fobs.

0301117792US

WINKeyFobWithIntegratedKey

PassiveEntryKeyFob

ToUnlockTheDoorsAndTailgate

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door. Push the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Settings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors.

ToLockTheDoorsAndTailgate

Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

SoundHornWithLock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm system.

UsingThePanicAlarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

AirSuspension(RemoteLoweringOfTheVehicle) —IfEquipped

For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be lowered by pushing the key fob air suspension lowering button two times. When key fob lowering is requested, the vehicle will send a series

of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue these alerts until it successfully lowers.

The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to lower remotely:

• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) ride height.
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• All doors must be closed.
  • The key fob must be out of the vehicle.

CancelingRemoteLowering

Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.

To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspension lowering button one time during the lowering process. When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will chirp two times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.

NOTE: Refer to "Air Suspension System" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

ReplacingTheBatteryInTheKeyFobWith RemoteControl

The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

0301117793US

EmergencyKeyRemoval

0301117809US

EmergencyKeyRemoval

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

RemoveScrewFromKeyFobCase

Line drawing of a handheld electric shaver device (no text or symbols)

0301117795US
SeparatingKeyFobCase

Line drawing of a car key and its open hood (no text or symbols)

0301101915NA

SeparatingKeyFobCase

1. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

2. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in step #2 for removal.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

ProgrammingAdditionalKeyFobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.

GeneralInformation

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

0301127600US

WirelessIgnitionSwitch

1-OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3—ON/RUN
4 — START

Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.

graph TD
    A["1 OFF"] --> B["2 ACC"]
    B --> C["3 RUN"]
    C --> D["4 STOP"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

0301113478US
KeylessPushButtonIgnition

1-OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3—ON/RUN

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the key fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob.

NOTE:

• "Keyed" Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC when the driver door is open.
• "Keyless"Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN when the driver door is open.
• The instrument cluster display will display "Key In Ignition."

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

•Gear selector in PARK
- Doors closed
- Hood closed
•HAZARD switch off
- BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
  • Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
  • Vehicle security alarm not active

WARNING!

- Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.Carbon Monoxideispoisonousandcancauseseriousinjury ordeathwheninhaled.

- Keepkeyfobsawayfromchildren.Operationofthe RemoteStartSystem,windows,doorlocksorother controlscouldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

Remote Start Abort Message

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

- Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset

The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.

NOTE:

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle

Push and release the remote start button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable with a one time push of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN mode.

NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information on Remote Start Comfort System operation.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.

NOTE:A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key.

During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a

problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The SentryKeyImmobilizersystemisnotcompatible with some aftermarketremotestartingsystems.Useof thesesystemsmayresultinvehiclestartingproblems andlossofsecurityprotection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Customer Key Programming

Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Alwaysremovethekeyfobsfromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.
• ForvehiclesequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go—Ignition,alwaysremembertoplacetheignitionin theOFFposition.

NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed.

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle security light will flash.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information).

2. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF."

3. For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF" and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

4. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

5. Push lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

6. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same

exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information).

- Push the lock button on the key fob.

1. If any doors are open, close them.

The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

To Disarm The System

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.

2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door handle. If equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information.

3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.

4. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).

5. For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.

The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rearming Of The System

The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

Security System Manual Override

The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

DOORS

Manual Door Locks

Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.

Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock knob.

Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed.

The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofan collision,lockthevehicledoorsasyoudriveaswell aswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Beforeexitingavehicle, alwaysshifttheautomatic transmissionintoPARKorthemanualtransmission intoFIRSTgearOREVERSE, applytheparking brake, turnthevehicleOFF, removethekeyfobs fromvehicle, andlockalldoors. andlockyour vehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinvehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle.Leavingchildrenina vehicleunattendedisdangerousforanumberof reasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatally injured.Childrenshouldbewarnednotto touchtheparkingbrake,brakepedalorthegear selector.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildorothers couldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Children shouldbewarnednottotouchtheparkingbrake, brakepedalorthegearselector.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle,orinalocationaccessibletochildren,anddonotleavetheignitionofavehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

The power door lock switches are on each front door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.

NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.

PowerDoorLockSwitch

If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

ToUnlockFromTheDriver'sSide:

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

Hand holding a mechanical component, no visible text or symbols on the object itself

GrabTheDoorHandleToUnlock

NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press," refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ToUnlockFromThePassengerSide:

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").

PreventingInadvertentLockingOfPassiveEntry KeyFobInVehicle:

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs.

If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).

ToLockTheVehicle'sDoors:

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle lock button to lock all doors.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

DoNOTGrabTheDoorHandleWhenLocking

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

- The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.

GeneralInformation

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.

AutomaticDoorsUnlock—IfEquipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).

AutomaticDoorsUnlockProgramming—IfEquipped

The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

- For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a bracket and door, with no visible text or symbols

Child-ProtectionDoorLockLocation

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

ChildLockControl

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinavehicleinacollision. Rememberthatthereardoorscanonlybeopenedfrom theoutsidewiththeChild-Protectionlocksareengaged(locked).

NOTE:

• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

- For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopleorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts. Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareasaremore likelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Manual Front Seat Adjustment

ManualFrontSeatForward/RearwardAdjustment

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

ManualSeatAdjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Seriousinjuryor deathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjustedseatbelt.

ManualFrontSeatReclineAdjustment

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seat back is in the upright position

Line drawing of a car seatbelt component with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

ManualReclineLever

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DumpFeature(ManualReclineSeatOnly)—StandardCab

Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat back to swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This "dump" feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat.

WARNING!

• Donotstandorleaninfrontoftheseatwhile actuatingthehandle.Theseatbackmayswingforwardandhityoucausinginjury.
  • To avoid injury, place your hand on these seat back and actuat the handle, then position these seat back in the desired position.

40-20-40FrontBenchSeat—IfEquipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment.

Manual Rear Seat Adjustment

RecliningRearSeats—IfEquipped

The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position, release the handle.

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest.In acollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt,which couldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.

PowerSeatSwitches

1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

RecliningTheSeatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Seriousinjury ordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjustedseatbelt.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderapowerseatorimpede itsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamagetotheseat controls.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedifmovement isstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat'spath.

PowerLumbar—IfEquipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and control panel (no text or symbols)

LumbarControlSwitch

Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion.

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver's seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2.

The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat cushion.

ProgrammingTheMemoryFeature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicle's ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., driver's seat, outside mirrors and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.

4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory" in this section.

LinkingAndUnlinkingTheRemoteKeylessEntry KeyFobToMemory

Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the feature has to be selected.

- If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the "Memory Linked To Fob" feature through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

- If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the "Key Fob Linked To Memory" feature through the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

To program your key fobs, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicle's ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" for instructions on how to set a memory profile.

1. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display.
2. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.

NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MemoryPositionRecall

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

DriverOneMemoryPositionRecall

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch, push memory button (1) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.

DriverTwoMemoryPositionRecall

• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, push memory button (2) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat and the power pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

EasyEntry/ExitSeat

This feature provides automatic driver's seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver's seat moves depends on where you have the driver's seat positioned when you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).

- When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver's seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver's seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position.

• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver's seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver's seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver's seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to be able to pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seatheater. It may cause burn seven at low temperatures, especially if used for long period so time.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatorseatbackthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorcushion. Thismaycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sittingina seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns duetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureoftheseat.

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

FrontHeatedSeats

The front heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front heated seats control buttons are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the heated seat button setting on.

once to turn the HI

• Press the heated seat button the LO setting on.
  a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button heating elements off.
  a third time to turn the

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver's seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

RearHeatedSeats

On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console.

There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator

lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.

- Push the heated seat button setting on.

once to turn the HI

- Push the heated seat button the LO setting on.

a second time to turn

- Push the heated seat button heating elements off.

a third time to turn the

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the ventilated seat button
  * once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button choose LO.
  * a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button the ventilated seat OFF.
  * a third time to turn

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Manual Folding Rear Seats (Mega Cab Models)

FoldingRearSeat—TableMode

Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down and used as a table.

To fold down either rear seat back:

1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted into the side of the window (no text or symbols)

TableModeHandle

2. Fold the seat back forward.

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

1. Lift the seat back, to return the seat to the upright position. Be sure the seat back is locked in place.

ManualFoldingRearSeat—FoldFlat

Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward when the seat back is folded flat.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Cargomustbesecurelytieddownbeforedriving yourvehicle.Improperlysecuredcargocanfly aroundinasuddenstoporcollisionandstrike someoneinthevehicle,causingseriousinjuryor death.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To fold either rear seat flat:

1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either of the rear seats.

1. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.

1. Lift the seat back, to return the seat to the upright position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

WARNING!

Animproperlylatchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjury ordeath.Makesurethattheseatbackissecurely lockedintoposition.Iftheseatbackinnotsecurely lockedintopositiontheseatwillnotprovidethe properstabilityforchildseatsand/orpassengers.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models)

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.

GroceryBagHooks

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• Alloccupants, including the driver, should not operate vehicle or sitin vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in ordertominimize risk of neck injury in the event of acrash.
• Headrestraintsshouldneverbeadjustedwhilethe vehicleisinmotion.Drivingavehiclewiththehead restraintsimproperlyadjustedorremovedcould causeseriousinjuryordeathintheeventofa collision.

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Head Restraint Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

AdjustmentButtons

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

Rear Head Restraint Adjustment

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

Release/AdjustmentButtons

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

NOTE:

• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Safety" for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

Front Head Restraint Removal

To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.

NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

WARNING!

• A looseheadrestraintthrownforwardinacollision orhardstopcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathto occupantsofthevehicle.Alwayssecurelystowremovedheadrestraintsinalocationoutsidethe occupantcompartment.
• ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Followthe re-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperating thevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

Rear Head Restraint Removal

To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.

NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be folded up.

WARNING!

• A looseheadrestraintthrownforwardinacollision orhardstopcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathto occupantsofthevehicle.Alwayssecurelystowremovedheadrestraintsinalocationoutsidethe occupantcompartment.
• ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Followthe re-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperating thevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column, below the multifunction lever.

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and directional arrows indicating left-hand rule (no text or symbols)

TiltSteeringLever

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcausethe drivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Failuretofollow thiswarningmayresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time may vary based on the temperature of the surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls. There are also buttons located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

- Press the heated steering wheel button the heating element on.

once to turn

- Press the heated steering wheel button to turn the heating element off.

a second time

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel painted the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burn seven at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Donotplaceanythingonthesteeringwheelthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorsteering wheelcoversofanytypeandmaterial.Thismay causethesteeringwheelheatertooverheat.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustablePedalsSwitch

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
- The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The following messages will appear on vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out: "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse".

NOTE:

• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
- For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthepedalswhilethevehicleismoving. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always adjustthepedalswhilethevehicleisparked.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleundertheadjustablepedalsor impedeitsabilitytomove,asitmaycausedamageto thepedalcontrols.Pedaltravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheadjustablepedal'spath.

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Simple line drawing of a car rearview mirror with an arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

AdjustingRearviewMirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off through the touchscreen.

• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn the feature off.

0306114048US

AutomaticDimmingMirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to them mirroring during cleaning, never spray any cleanings solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing.

AutomaticDimmingMirrorWithRearViewCamera

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect display. For further information, refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia".

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartherawaythan theyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyourpassenger sideconvexmirrorcouldcauseyoutocollidewith anothervehicleorotherobject.Useyourinsidemirror whenjudgingthesizeordistanceofvehicleseenin thepassengersideconvexmirror.Somevehicleswill nothaveaconvexpassengersidemirror.

Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The driver's outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver's door trim panel.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with an arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols present)

PowerMirrorControlsLocation

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.

1 — Mirror Select Buttons

2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard with directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

PowerMirrorMovement

Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped

If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position.

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).

Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag.

PowerFoldingMirrorSwitch

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ResettingThePowerFoldingOutsideMirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
- The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
- The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.

ToResetThePowerFoldingMirrors:

1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror to its full forward position.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror to the full retract position (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

NOTE:

- The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully open or close. You should slow down to a moderate speed and complete the operation.

- When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to protect the motors from over heating.

OutsideMirrorsFoldingFeature

All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.

Diagram of a car's seatbelt mechanism showing the grip and wheel (no text or symbols)

FoldingMirror

CAUTION!

Itisrecommendedtofoldthemirrorsintothefull rearwardpositiontoresistdamagewhenenteringacar washoranarrowlocation.

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or out).

Diagram of a car side mirror with an arrow pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

TrailerTowingPosition

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.

A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately.

Diagram of a car side mirror highlighting the front wheel, with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

BlindspotMirror

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Climate ols" in this section for further information.

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped

Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

Diagram of a car interior showing a device with an arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present

Illuminated VanityMirror

"Slide-On-Rod"FeaturesOfSunVisor—IfEquipped

The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.

To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature, rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the "Slide-On-Rod" until the sun visor is in the desired position.

Diagram of a car interior showing the lid and handle with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

"Slide-On-Rod"ExtenderHeadlightSwitchLocation

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect radio. For further information refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" and "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia".

CAUTION!

Donotuseabrasivecleaningcomponents,solvents,steelwoolorotherabrasivematerialstocleanthe lenses.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the headlight position. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

HeadlightPosition

0311116387US

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant "lights on" condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.

Interior view of a car dashboard with gauges and a central control panel (no visible text or symbols)

High/LowBeamSwitch

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off by selecting "ON" under "Auto Dim High Beams" within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.

ToActivate

1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

ToDeactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the

OFF position. The headlight time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

0311115741US

AutomaticHeadlightPosition

To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control.

0311115742US

FogLightSwitch

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster display will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

Lane Change Assist — If Equipped

Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on by pushing the cargo lights button located just below the headlight switch.

0311116744US

Cargo/BedLightsButtonOnHeadlightSwitch

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the vehicle's speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these lights can also be turned on using the switch located just inside the pickup box. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display when this lights are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights off.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

BedLightSwitchWithoutRamBox

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis frame with a black arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

BedLightSwitchWithRamBox

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.

Battery Saver

To protect the life of your vehicle's battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Courtesy Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.

Courtesy/ReadingLights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (full right position), or when the unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens.

FrontCourtesy/ReadingLights

Close-up of a computer control panel with a black arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols visible)

RearPassengerCourtesy/ReadingLight
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes.

AmbientLight

The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor console area.

DimmerControl

The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control to the right (brighter) or to the left (dimmer).

0311115743US
DimmerControl

"PartyMode"

When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the off detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.

"ParadeMode"

When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed the "Parade" mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further details.

Illuminated Approach

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to "Mirrors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the way to the top detent).

The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome OFF" position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the way to the bottom detent).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off by moving the instrument panel dimmer into the "Dome Defeat" detent position.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wipers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever to select the desired wiper speed.

WindshieldWiper/WasherSwitch

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

IntermittentWiperSystem

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first detent.

The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

WindshieldWashers

To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position.

If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed

while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshieldcould leadtoacollision.Youmightnotseeothervehiclesor otherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingofthewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthewindshield withthedefrosterbeforeandduringwindshield washeruse.

MistFeature

When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off.

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature.

NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.

Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• TransmissionInNEUTRALPosition—When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• RemoteStartModeInhibit— On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

ManualClimateControlsWithoutATouchscreen

ManualClimateControlDescriptions

IconDescription
	MAXA/CSettingRotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C.This is the coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
	A/CButtonPush the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
	RecirculationButtonPush and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.NOTE:Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
FRONT	FrontDefrostSettingTurn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
REAR	RearDefrostButtonPush and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
	TemperatureControlUse this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
	BlowerControlThere are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
	ModesControl:Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IconDescription
PanelMode	PanelModeAir comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-LevelMode	Bi-LevelModeAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.NOTE:Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FloorMode	FloorModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
MixMode	MixModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89

EconomyMode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.

Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen

0313119406US
Uconnect4C/4CNAVWithManualTemperatureControls

ManualClimateControlWithTouchscreenDescriptions

IconDescription
	MAXA/CSettingPress the button on the touchscreen to select MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
	A/CButtonPush the A/C button on the touchscreen or faceplate to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C).A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
	RecirculationButtonPush and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.NOTE:Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
FRONT	FrontDefrostSettingPush the button to activate Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
REAR	RearDefrostButtonPush and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
	TemperatureControlPress the arrows on the touchscreen or faceplate to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Pressing the down arrow indicates cooler temperatures, and pressing the up arrow indicates warmer temperatures.
	BlowerControlThere are seven blower speeds. Press the buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IconDescription
PanelMode	PanelModeAir comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-LevelMode	Bi-LevelModeAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.NOTE:Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FloorMode	FloorModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
MixMode	MixModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

EconomyMode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate

the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen

Uconnect3With5-inchDisplayWithAutomaticTemperatureControls

1001115253US

94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

0313129069US

Uconnect4C/4CNAVWithAutomaticTemperatureControls

ControlDescriptions

NOTE:

Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.

IconDescription
	MAXA/CButtonPress and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
	A/CButtonPress and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
	RecirculationButtonPress and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.NOTE:Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IconDescription
AUTO	AUTOButton—IfEquippedAutomatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
	FrontDefrostButtonPress and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
	RearDefrostButtonPush and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Uconnect3	DriverandPassengerTemperatureUpandDownButtonsProvides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger's temperature will move up and down with the driver's temperature, when it is increased and decreased, respectively.
Uconnect4C/4CNAV	NOTE:Temperature numbers will only be displayed if the system is equipped with Automatic Temperature Control.

98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IconDescription
SYNC	SYNCButton—IfEquippedPress the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the rear passengers' temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
FaceplateKnob	BlowerControlBlower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system.There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. For Uconnect 3, press the button to access the blower screen and control the blower.
Touchscreen Buttons
PanelModePanel	ModeAir comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-LevelMode	Bi-LevelModeAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.NOTE:Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FloorMode	FloorModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
MixMode	MixModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
OFF	ClimateControlOFFButtonPress and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the Climate Control System off.

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Climate Control Functions

A/C(AirConditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

MAXA/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.

On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the control button to blink and then turns off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

AutomaticOperation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

- It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

- The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

ManualOperationOverride

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

WinterOperation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherearwindow.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanersonthe interiorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftclothanda mildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltotheheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffaftersoaking withwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive windowcleanersontheinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

CabinAirFilter

The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

OperatingTipsChart

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot weather and vehicle interior is very hot	Set the mode control to on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort.
Warm weather	Turn on and set the mode control to the position.
Cool Sunny	Operat position.
Cool & Humid conditions	Set the mode control to on to keep windows clear.
Co	Set the control to the on. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control towards the position.

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WINDOWS

Power Windows — If Equipped

PowerWindowSwitches

The power window controls located on the driver's door trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab and Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenunattendedinavehicle.Donot leavethekeyfobinornearthevehicleorinalocation accessibletochildren, and donotleavetheignition of avehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Gointhe ACCorON/RUNmode. Occupants, particularly unattendedchildren, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto-Down

Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way, push to the switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

Auto-UpFeatureWithAnti-PinchProtection (4-DoorModelsDriverAndFrontPassengerDoor Only)—IfEquipped

Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

Thereisnoanti-pinchprotectionwhenthewindowis almostclosed.Besuretoclearallobjectsfromthe windowbeforeclosing.

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ResetAuto-Up

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

WindowLockoutSwitch(4-DoorModelsOnly)

The window lockout switch on the driver's door allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or down position. To enable the window controls, push the window lock switch again and return the switch to the released or up position.

WindowLockoutSwitch

PowerSlidingRearWindow—IfEquipped

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console.

RearWindowSwitch

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the switch to the left to close the glass.

ManualSlidingRearWindow—IfEquipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the window.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console between the courtesy/reading lights.

PowerSunroofSwitch

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildrenunattendedinvehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Neverleavethekey fobinornearthevehicle,orinalocationaccessible tochildren.Donotleavetheignitionofvehicle equipped with KeylessEnter-N-GointheACCor ON/RUNmode.Occupants,particularlyunattended children,canbecomeentrappedbythepowersun-roofwhileoperatingthepowersunroofswitch.Such entrapmentmayresultinseriousinjuryordeath.
• Inacollision, thereisagreaterriskofbeingthrown from vehiclewithanopensunroof. You could also be seriously injuredorkilled. Always fasten your seatbelt properly and makes sure all passengers are as properly secured.
• Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesunroof. Neverallowyourfingers,otherbodyparts,orany object,toprojectthroughthesunroofopening.In-jurymayresult.

Opening Sunroof

Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Manual

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Closing Sunroof

Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Manual

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent" and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

HOOD

To Open The Hood

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a component, no text or symbols present

HoodRelease

1. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it, before raising the hood.

Front view of a pickup truck with grille and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

0311115739US
SafetyLatchLocation(1500SeriesShown)

To Close The Hood

Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehood to closeit. Useafirmdownwardpushatthefrontcenter of the hoodtoensurethatbothlatchesengage.

TAILGATE

Opening

To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and pull the tailgate down.

Closing

To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are latched.

NOTE: Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to ensure it is securely latched.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink channels.

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

0449097657US

HomeLinkButtons

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

WARNING!

- Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouaretrainingtheuniversaltransceiver.Do nottrainthetransceiverifpeople,petsorother objectsareinthepathofthedoororgate.Onlyuse

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

thistransceiverwithagaragedooropenerthathasa "stopandreverse"featureasrequiredbyFederal safetystandards. Thisincludesmostgaragedoor openermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donotusea garagedooropenerwithoutthesesafetyfeatures. Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,ontheInternetat www.HomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.

- Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegaragewhletrainingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascancauseseriousinjuryordeath.

NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when "CHANNELS CLEARED" appears on the display.

NOTE:

• For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door remains open at all times.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

TrainingTheGarageDoorOpener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door remains open at all times.

1. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.

2. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button.

3. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

- It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

- If "DID NOT TRAIN" appears in the Instrument Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2.

1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

1. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will show "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLinkButton (RollingCode)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Donot releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button.

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

• If the instrument cluster display shows "DID NOT TRAIN", repeat from Step 2.

• Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The instrument cluster display will display "CHANNEL #TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLinkButton (Non-RollingCode)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Donot releasethebutton.

3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door remains open at all times.

1. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
2. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release ("cycle"), your hand - held transmitter every two seconds.
3. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

• If the instrument cluster display shows "DID NOT TRAIN", repeat from Step 2.

• Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The instrument cluster display will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLinkButton (Canadian/GateOperator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door remains open at all times.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the instrument cluster display shows "CHANNEL # TRAINING" Donotreleasethebutton.

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Canadian/ Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the instrument cluster display shows "CHANNELS CLEARED."

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

- Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegaragewhile programmingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascancause seriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouareprogrammingtheuniversaltransceiver.Donotprogramthetransceiverifpeople,pets orotherobjectsareinthepathofthedoororgate. Onlyusethistransceiverwithagaragedooropener thathasa"stopandreverse"featureasrequiredby Federalsafetystandards.Thisincludesmostgarage dooropenermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donot useagaragedooropenerwithoutthesesafetyfeatures.Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,ontheInternet atHomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Storage

GloveCompartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area.

1 — Upper Glove Compartment

2 — Lower Glove Compartment

To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on the handle release. The glove compartment door will automatically open.

To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release handle.

Interior view of a car showing the intake compartment with a black plastic tray (no text or symbols visible)

LowerGloveCompartment

DoorStorage

FrontDoorStorage—IfEquipped

Storage areas and bottle holders (driver's side only) are located in the door trim panels.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest, dashboard, and air vent with arrows indicating flow direction (no text or symbols)

FrontDoorStorage

122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

RearDoorStorage—IfEquipped

Storage compartments are located in both the driver and passenger rear door trim panels.

Diagram of a car backrest with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

RearDoorStorage

CenterStorageCompartment—IfEquipped

The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both and upper and lower storage area.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and seat compartments with a black arrow indicating a location or movement (no text or symbols present)

CenterStorageCompartment

WARNING!

• Thisarmrestisnotaseat.Anyoneseatedonthe armrestcouldbeseriouslyinjuredduringvehicle operation,oracollision.Onlyusethecenterseating positionwhenthearmrestisfullyupright.
• Inacollision, the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed at total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices, refer to "Electrical Power Outlets" for further information.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and air vent (no text or symbols visible)

UpperStorageCompartment

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open the lower storage bin.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard and seat area showing structural components (no text or symbols)

LowerStorageBin

WARNING!

Donotoperatethisvehiclewithaconsolecompartmentlidintheopenposition.Drivingwiththeconsole compartmentlidopenmayresultininjuryinacollision.

124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The center console is equipped with a front storage bin located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be equipped with a manual sliding top door.

Interior view of a car intake tray with a downward arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

FrontStorageBinWithDoor—IfEquipped

SeatbackStorage

Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Driver'sSideSeatbackStorage

SecondRowIn-FloorStorageBin—IfEquipped

In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for cleaning.

Mechanical switch component with a black arrow pointing to a circular button, no text or symbols present

In-FloorStorageBinAndLatch

To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid.

NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open the lid.

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with a handle and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

OpenedStorageBin

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

StorageBin(RegularCab)

The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the length of the cab.

FoldFlatLoadFloor—IfEquipped

Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!

Donotoperatethevehiclewithlooseitemsstoredon theloadfloor. While driving or an accident you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants, resulting in serious or fatal injury.

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor/QuadCab

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rear compartment with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor

1. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until the load floor unfolds into position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car seatbelt and rear seats (no text or symbols visible)

LoadFloorInOpenPosition

1. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor/CrewCab

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

Interior view of a vehicle air intake bay with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

LoadFloorLegsInStowedPosition

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Unfold both the legs using the straps. 3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rearview and side-mounted components, with no visible text or symbols.

LoadFloorLegsInOpenedPosition

LoadFloorInOpenPosition

1. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

PositioningTheLoadFloorForStorageAccess UnderTheSeat

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor.

WARNING!

Donotdrivewiththeloadfloorintheupposition. Whenstoppingfastorinanaccident,theloadfloor couldmovetothedownpositioncausingserious injury.

QuadCab—IfEquipped

Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with no text or symbols

LoadFloorSecuringStraps/QuadCab

130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CrewCab—IfEquipped

Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

LoadFloorSecuringStraps/CrewCab

1. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle.

BelowRearSeatStorage(CrewCab/QuadCab)

The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.

To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rear panel with a highlighted component (no text or symbols visible)

CrewCabStorage

NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat floor, refer to "Fold Flat Load Floor" in this section.

Cupholders

FrontSeatCupholders

For vehicles equipped with bucket seats, two cupholders are located next to the center console storage bin.

Diagram of a car interior showing internal compartments and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

FrontCupholdersForBucketSeats

VehiclesEquippedWith40/20/40Seats

The cupholders are located on the backside of the center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.

RearCupholders—IfEquipped

Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located in the center armrest.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat, dashboard, and side panel (no text or symbols)

RearArmrestCupholder

132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.

Electrical Power Outlets

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the standard "cigar lighter" plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the outlet indicating "12V DC," together with either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.

A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery, and can provide power at all times.

CAUTION!

• Donotexceedthemaximumpowerof160Watts(13 Amps)at12Volts.Ifthe160Watts(13Amps)power ratingisexceeded,thefuseprotectingthesystem willneedtobereplaced.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugsonly. Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepoweroutletsas thiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthefuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancausedamagenot coveredbyyourNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations:

- Lower left and lower right of the center stack when equipped with a bench seat.

1 — Power Outlet

2 — USB Port (Charge Only)

- Center console when equipped with bucket seats.

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

- Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad Cab or Crew Cab.

PowerOutlet—RearCenterConsole

PowerOutlet—RearCenterConsoleFuse

PowerOutletFuseLocations

1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin / USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90-F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeofoutlet shouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
  • Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessoriesthatcanbepluggedindrawpower fromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennotinuse(i.e., cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,ifpluggedinlong enough,thevehicle'sbatterywilldischargesufficientlytodegradebatterylifeand/orpreventthe enginefromstarting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly. Only us these intermittently and with greater caution.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,orlong periodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(withaccessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbedrivena sufficientlengthoftimetoallowthegeneratorto rechargethevehicle'sbattery.

Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If Equipped

A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available. For vehicles with a bench seat, the cup holder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver.

Power Inverter — If Equipped

A 115 or 230 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset.

PowerInverterOutlet

To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.

NOTE:

• The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Donotinsertanyobjectsintothereceptacles.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
  •Closethelidwhennotinuse.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped

There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution Center.

You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All switches can now be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

For further information on using the auxiliary switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate links.

138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

PICKUP BOX

The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience.

1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats

NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available from an authorized dealer.

You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.

WARNING!

• Thepickupboxisintendedforloadcarryingpurposesonly,notforpassengers,whoshouldsitin seatsanduseseatbelts.
• Careshouldalwaysbeexercisedwhenoperatinga vehiclewithunrestrainedcargo.Vehiclespeedsmay needtobereduced.Severeturnsorroughroadsmay causeshiftingorbouncingofthecargothatmay resultinvehicledamage.Ifwidebuildingmaterials aretobefrequentlycarried,theinstallationofa supportisrecommended.Thiswillrestrainthecargo andtransfertheloadtothepickupboxfloor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of materials suspended above the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. The use of propers supports will permit loading up to therated payload.
• Unrestrainedcargomaybethrownforwardinan accidentcausingseriousorfatalinjury.

There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box.

There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.

Cargo Camera — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box. The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.

The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).

A touchscreen button 🔗 to indicate the current active camera image being displayed is made available whenever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.

Also, a touchscreen button to switch the display to rear view camera image is made available whenever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.

A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-VERSE gear.

A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously until the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

TurningCargoCameraOnOrOff—WithUconnect4C/4CNAV

1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Cargo Camera" button → to turn the Cargo Camera system on.

NOTE: Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button, the Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the "X" soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected screen will appear.

140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED

The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management system consisting of three features:

• Integrated box side storage bins
  • Cargo extender/divider
  • Bed rail tie-down system

RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins

Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles of evenly distributed cargo.

Technical illustration of RamBoxCargo Storage Bins showing internal components (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

CAUTION!

Failuretofollowthefollowingitemscouldcause damagetothevehicle:

• Assurethatallcargoinsidethestoragebinsis properlysecured.
- Donotexceedcargoweightratingof150lb(68kg) 1500seriesvehiclesor300lbs(136kg)for2500and 3500seriesvehiclesperbin.

To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.

NOTE:RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is pushed if the RamBox is locked.

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and side panel, showing lane markings and a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols present)

RamBoxPushbuttonAndLock

CAUTION!

Leavingthelidopenforextendedperiodsoftime couldcausethevehiclebatterytodischarge.Ifthelid isrequiredtostayopenforextendedperiodsoftime,it isrecommendedthatthebinlightsbeturnedoff manuallyusingtheon/offswitch.

The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch located at the rear of each storage bin.

142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on.

Line drawing of a door with a switch and cable, no text or symbols present

RamBoxLightSwitch

Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.

NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.

Locking And Unlocking RamBox

Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). Refer to "Keys" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further details. The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the key to the upright (vertical) position before removing the key from the push button.

CAUTION!

• Ensurecargobinlidsareclosedandlatchedbefore movingordrivingvehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
• DamagetotheRamBoxbinmayoccurduetoheavy/sharpobjectsplacedinbinthatshiftduetovehicle motion. Inordertominimizepotentialfordamage, secureallcargotopreventmovementandprotect insidesurfacesofbinfromheavy/sharpobjectswith appropriatepadding.

RamBox Safety Warning

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

• Alwaysclosethestoragebincoverswhenyour vehicleisunattended.
• Donotallowchildrentohaveaccesstothestorage bins.Onceinthestoragebin,youngchildrenmay notbeabletoescape.Iftrappedinthestoragebin, childrencandiefromsuffocationorheatstroke.
• Inanaccident,seriousinjurycouldresultifthe storagebincoversarenotproperlylatched.
• Donotdrivethevehiclewiththestoragebincovers open.
• Keepthestoragebincoversclosedandlatchedwhile thevehicleisinmotion.
• Donotuseastoragebinlatchasatiedown.

RamBoxStorageBinCoverEmergencyReleaseLever—IfEquipped

As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a component inserted into a housing (no text or symbols visible)

0310115716US

StorageBinCoverEmergencyReleaseLever

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Bed Extender — If Equipped

The bed extender has three functional positions:

• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position

StoragePosition

The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use.

To install the bed extender into the storage position, perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.

0318128332US

CenterHandleAndLock

1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle

1. With the side gates open, position the extender fully forward in the bed against the front panel.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle interior showing structural components and a hand holding the door (no text or symbols)

StoragePositionCargoTieDownLoop

1. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle seat assembly with a black arrow pointing to the component (no text or symbols present)

146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

SideGatesClosed

1. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place.

DividerPosition

The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo.

To install the bed extender into a divider position, perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.

CenterHandleAndLock

1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle

1. With the side gates open, position the extender so the outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket being inserted into a housing (no text or symbols present)

AligningGateToSlots

1. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed.

2. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

SideGatesClosed

1. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.

148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ExtenderPosition

The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed. The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle's front bumper assembly (no text or symbols)

ExtenderPosition

To install the bed extender into the extender position, perform the following:

1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with two black arrows indicating directional movement (no text or symbols)

ExtenderInstallation

1. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149

WARNING!

Toreducetheriskofpotentialinjuryorproperty damage:

• Cargomustbesecured.
- Donotexceedcargoloadratingofyourvehicle.
- Secureallloadstotruckutilizingcargotiedowns.
- Extendershouldnotbeusedascargotiedown.
- When vehicle is in motion on the not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg) load on the tail gate.
• Thebedextenderisnotintendedforoffroaduse.
- Whennotinuse, theextender/dividershouldbein stowedordividerpositionwiththetailgateclosed.
- Wheninuseallhandlesaretobeinthelocked position.

150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

CAUTION!

Themaximumloadpercleatshouldnotexceed250lbs (113kg)andtheangleoftheloadoneachcleatshould notexceed45degreesabovehorizontal,ordamageto thecleatorcleatrailmayoccur.

There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis panel with two black arrows indicating fasteners or sensors (no text or symbols present)

AdjustableCleats

Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo properly secure.

To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.

1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS

Camper Applications

Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please refer to the "Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading" document available from an authorized dealer. For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.

WARNING!

To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the exhaust system on vehicle equipped with "Capor Slide-In Campers" should extend beyond the over-hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.

NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) must be provided.

152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

EASY-OFF TAILGATE

To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate can be removed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or Remote Keyless Entry, the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.

Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.

1. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing inward in the locking tab.

Diagram showing a hand pressing down on a device with a black arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

0322115832US

LockingTab

1. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the connector bracket does not fall into the sill.

2. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153

1. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode.
2. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or reinstalling the tailgate.

Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and or power locks (if equipped), refer to "Disconnecting The Rear Camera — If Equipped" in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot.

NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support cables.

154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
2. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
3. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot.
4. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.

NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.

WARNING!

Toavoidinhalingcarbonmonoxide, which is deadly, the exhaust system on vehicle equipped with "Capor Slide-In Campers" should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.

Locking Tailgate

The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck with the key fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.

TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover which consists of different features:

• Easy Tri-Fold cover
  • Tonneau fore aft locator
  • Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking capability

NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured at the front of the box without removing completely.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal

To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two Tonneau Cover clamps located on the driver and passenger underside of the Tonneau Cover.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

ClampedPosition

1. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides to the semi clamped position.

Hand operating a mechanical lever assembly with no visible text or symbols

SemiClampedPosition

NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.

156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up into the proper released position.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

ProperReleasedPositionSecondPanelPosition

1. Pick up on the Tonneau Cover and fold it back onto the second panel.

Line drawing of a pickup truck rear view showing front bumper and backrest tray (no text or symbols)

CAUTION!

Makesurethetonneaucoverclampandclampwireare intheproperreleasedposition.Iftheclampandclamp wirearenotproperlyreleased,damagethetonneau covermaterialwillresult.

1. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third panel.

Line drawing of a pickup truck showing front compartment and side panel (no text or symbols)

ThirdPanelPosition

1. Once in the third panel position, pull down on the second set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides to the semi clamped position.

NOTE: When folding the center and rear panels, the sections MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover material.

Interior view of a vehicle showing steering wheel and dashboard with a circular overlay indicating no visible text or symbols.

IncorrectFolding—WillCauseDamage

158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand adjusting a component with a checkmark indicator (no text or symbols present)

Hand holding a mechanical component with attached parts, no visible text or symbols

CorrectFolding—HoldPanelsTogetherSemiClampedPosition
7. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up into the proper released position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

ProperReleasedPositionStowageStrap
8. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to ensure the cover stays together.

Diagram of a curved mechanical component with radiating lines, no visible text or symbols

1. With two people, remove the cover.
   NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely before removing.

160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation

To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and push the cover forward against the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the clamps from the stowed position.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

StowedPosition

1. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped position.

Hand holding a mechanical clamp or tool against a vehicle chassis (no visible text or symbols)

SemiClampedPosition

1. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to properly engage the clamps.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with motion arrows (no text or symbols)

ClampedPosition

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially clamped to the truck bed flange.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a diagonal no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

ImproperClampPosition

1. Disengage the stowage straps.

162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.

NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is in this position.

Line drawing of a pickup truck rear bumper with visible seat cover and side panel (no text or symbols)

0322123558US

1. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.

NOTE: When folding the center and rear panels, the sections MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover material.

Mechanical component diagram with a circular symbol highlighting a diagonal line and an arrow, no readable text or symbols present.

IntermediatePosition(VehicleCannotBeDriven)IncorrectFolding—WillCauseDamage

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand adjusting a component with a checkmark indicator (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a pickup truck showing front wheel, roof, and side panel (no text or symbols)

CorrectFolding—HoldPanelsTogetherFullyUnfoldedPosition

164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to release the clamps from the stowed position.

1. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped position.

1. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to properly engage the clamps.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with motion arrows (no text or symbols)

ClampedPositionImproperClampPosition

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially clamped to the truck bed flange.

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a no-smoking symbol overlay (no text or symbols present)

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the clamped position by placing a lock through the locking hole.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

LockingHole

CAUTION!

Itisthedriver'sresponsibilitytoensuretheTonneau Coverisproperlyinstalledonthevehicle.Failureto followthisprocedurecanresultindetachmentofthe TonneauCoverfromthevehicleand/ordamagetothe vehicle/TonneauCover.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning

For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER....168

□Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....168

■PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER....170

□Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . .170

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....172

□Instrument Cluster Display Controls....173

□Display Menu Screens....175

□Oil Life Reset. 177

□Display Messages....178

□Display Menu Items....181

☐Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped .....189

■WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES....191

□Red Warning Lights....191

□Yellow Warning Lights....195

□Yellow Indicator Lights....199

□Green Indicator Lights....201

□White Indicator Lights....202

□Blue Indicator Lights....202

■ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .203

□Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity....203

■EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS....204

168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BaseInstrumentClusters

Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

- Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

2. Instrument Cluster Display

- When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

3. Speedometer

- Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous. Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant. Youmaywanttocallanaauthorizeddealerfor serviceifyourvehicleoverheats. If youdecidetolook underthehoodyourself, see "ServicingAndMaintenance." FollowthewarningsundertheCoolingSystem PressureCapparagraph.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcoulddamageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads"H,"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehiclewiththeairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointerdropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointerremainsonthe"H,"turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallanauthorizeddealerforservice.

170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

PremiumInstrumentClusters

Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

- Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

2. Voltmeter

- When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the

pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving, the electrical system should be serviced.

NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.

3. Oil Pressure Gauge

- The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

4. Speedometer

- Indicates vehicle speed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

6. Instrument Cluster Display

- When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

7. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous. Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant. Youmaywanttocallanaauthorizeddealerfor serviceifyourvehicleoverheats. Ifyoudecidetolook underthehoodyourself, see "ServicingAndMaintenance." FollowthewarningsundertheCoolingSystem PressureCapparagraph.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcoulddamageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads"H,"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehiclewiththeairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointerdropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointerremainsonthe"H,"turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallanauthorizeddealerforservice.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle's systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

BaseInstrumentClusterDisplay

PremiumInstrumentClusterDisplay

The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of the following:

•Speedometer
- Vehicle Info
•Fuel Economy Info
- Trip A
- Trip B
•Audio
- Trailer Tow

174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not equipped with a Uconnect touchscreen radio)

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following instrument cluster display control buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:

0402117821US
InstrumentClusterDisplayControlButtons

- UpArrowButton

△ Push and release the uparrow button to scroll upward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.

-DownArrowButton

Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu items, sub-menu screen, and vehicle settings.

•RightArrowButton

Push and release the rightarrow button to access/select the information screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to set displayed/selected features that can be reset.

- LeftArrowButton

Push and release the left arrow button to access/ select the information screens, submenu screens of a main menu item, or to return to the main menu.

Display Menu Screens

0402117825US

BaseInstrumentClusterDisplay

The instrument cluster display screens are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections:

1. CompassDisplay

Displays the current direction. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

2.TemperatureDisplay

Displays the outside temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

3.MainScreen

Displays main menu, submenus, settings.

1. WhiteTelltales

5.AmberTelltales

6.RedTelltales

1. Audio/PhoneInformationAndSubmenuInformation

176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The instrument cluster display screens are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:

1.MainScreen

The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and white for on demand information.

2. Audio/PhoneInformation and Submenu Information

Whenever there are submenus available, the position within the submenus is shown here.

1. Selectable Information (Compass, OutsideTemp, Range to Empty, TripA, TripB, AverageFuelEconomy, Trailer Trip(distanceonly), TrailerBrakeGain, Time)
2. Telltales/Indicators
   5.GearSelectorStatus
3. SelectableMenuIcons
4. AirSuspensionStatus-IfEquipped
   8.4WDStatus
5. Selectable Gauge2(TransTemp, OilTemp, OilLife, TrailerBrake, CurrentFuelEconomy)
6. Selectable Gauge1(TransTemp, OilTemp, OilLife, TrailerBrake, Currentfueleconomy)

The instrument cluster display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:

- FiveSecondStoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds

and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the instrument cluster display's compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure."

- UnstoredMessages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle).

- UnstoredMessagesUntilRUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start."

- FiveSecondUnstoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is "Automatic High Beams On."

Oil Life Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls for the following procedure(s).

VehiclesEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the downarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the rightarrow button to access the "Vehicle Info" screen, then scroll up or down to select "Oil Life."
4. Push and hold the rightarrow button to select "Reset".

178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Push and release the down arrow button to select "Yes," then push and release the rightarrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
2. Push and release the uparrow button to exit the instrument cluster display screen.

VehiclesNotEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the downarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the rightarrow button to access the "Vehicle Info" screen then scroll up or down to select "Oil Life."
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select "YES" by pushing the right arrow then push and release the right arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the uparrow button to exit the instrument cluster display screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Display Messages

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
  •Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
  •Service Antilock Brake System
  •Service Electronic Throttle Control
  •Service Power Steering
  • Cruise Off
  • Cruise Ready
  • Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(S) "Inflate Tire To XX"

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

•Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
•Service Tire Pressure System
- Parking Brake Engaged
- Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
- Battery Voltage Low
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
- Left Turn Signal Light Out
- Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
- Vehicle Not In Park
•Key In Ignition
•Key In Ignition Lights On
- Remote Start Active Key To Run
- Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
  •Service Airbag System
  •Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
  •Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
  •Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
  • Autostick Unavailable Service Required

180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
- Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
- Washer Fluid Low
•Service Air Suspension System
• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
•Normal Ride Height Achieved

• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
- Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
•Service Air Suspension System Immediately
- Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
- Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
- Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left.

Display Menu Items

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.

Speedometer

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the rightarrow button to cycle the display between mph and km/h.

VehicleInfo

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the rightarrow button to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:

• Tire Pressure
• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)

• Oil Temp

• Oil Life

• Fuel Filter Life
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
  •Gauge Summary — If Equipped
  •Engine Hours

FuelEconomy

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the rightarrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy.

•Current Fuel Economy Gauge
• Average Fuel Economy Value
- Range To Empty

TripA/TripB

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the rightarrow button to enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will display the following:

• Distance
  • Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time

Push and hold rightarrow button to reset all information.

TrailerTow

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the rightarrow button and the next screen will display the following trailer trip information:

• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right arrow button to reset the distance.

• Trailer Brake

• Output

• Type
  •Gain

Audio

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to display the active source.

StoredMessages

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a closed envelope.

ScreenSetupMenuItem

Push and release the upor downarrow button until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the rightarrow button to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

ScreenSetupDriverSelectableItems

UpperLeft

• None
• Compass (Default Setting)
• Outside Temp
  • Time
• Range To Empty
  • Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain

UpperRight

• None
• Compass

• Outside Temp (Default Setting)
  • Time

• Range To Empty
  • Average MPG

• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain

LowerLeft

• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
  • Time
• Range To Empty
  • Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain

184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LowerRight

• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
  • Time
• Range To Empty
  • Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain

LowerGauge

• None
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
  • Fuel Filter Life (Diesel)
• Battery Voltage (Diesel)
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake

Odometer

• No Decimals (Default Setting)
• Decimals

RestoreDefaults

• Cancel (Default Setting)
  •Ok

Settings—IfEquipped

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the upand downbutton until Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.

Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Vehicle Settings.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings.

• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit.

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated(LeftSubmenu Layer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenuLayer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Arabic (If Equipped)
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense			•Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display•Front Volume — Low; Medium; High•Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5	Rain Sensing Wipers	Auto Wipers	On; Off
6	Hill Start Assist	Hill Start Assist	On; Off
7	Headlights Off Delay	Lights Off Delay	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8	Illuminated Approach	Lights w/ Unlock	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9	Headlights On with Wipers	Lights w/ Wipers	On; Off
10	Automatic Highbeams	Auto Highbeams	On; Off
11	Flash Lights with Lock	Lights w/ Lock	On; Off
12	Auto Lock Doors	Auto Lock Doors	On; Off
13	Auto Unlock Doors	Auto Unlock Doors	On; Off
14 Sound Horn with Remote Start		Horn w/ Rmt Start On;	Off
15 Sound Horn with Remote Lock		Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off;	1st Press; 2nd Press
16 Remote Unlock Sequence		Remote Unlock Driver	Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to Memory		Key in Memory On;	Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19 Remote Start Comfort System		Rmt Start Comfort Off;	Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat			On; Off
21	Key-off Power Delay	Power Off Delay	Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22	Commercial Settings Commercial		Aux SwitchesPower Take-OffPIN SetupNOTE:If the vehicle's PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
23 Air	Suspension Display Alerts	Air Susp. Alerts All; Warnings Only
24 Aero Ride Height Mode		Aero Mode On; Off
25 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off
26 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off
27 Wheel Alignment Mode		Wheel Alignment On; Off
28	Horn w/ Remote Lower	Horn w/ Rmt Lwr	On; Off
29	Lights w/ Remote Lower	Lights w/ Rmt Lwr	On; Off
30	Trailer Select	Trailer Select	Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
31	Brake Type	Brake Type	Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH

188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated(LeftSubmenu Layer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenuLayer)
32	Trailer Name Trailer Name		• Trailer # (# is equal to slot position) • Boat • Car • Cargo • Dump • Equipment • Flatbed • Gooseneck • Horse • Livestock • Motorcycle • Snowmobile • Travel • Utility • 5th Wheel
33	Compass Variance Compass	Var 1-15 increments of 1
34	Calibrate Compass Compass	Cal Cancel; Calibrate
35	Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver	On; Off

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated(LeftSubmenu Layer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenuLayer)
36 Park	Assist Front Chime Volume	Park Assist Front Chime Volume	On; Off
37 Park	Assist Rear Chime Volume	Park Assist Rear Chime Volume	On; Off

TurnMenuOff—IfEquipped

Push and release the rightarrow button to exit the main menu.

Push and release any instrument cluster display control button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu again.

Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving

time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.

Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.

When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster.

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.

190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to "Battery Charge Warning Light" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction:

• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
  •Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
  •HVAC System
  •115V AC Power Inverter System
  • Audio and Telematics System

Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

- The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.

• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.

Whattodowhenanelectricalloadreductionaction messageispresent("BatterySaverOn" or "BatterySaver Mode")

During a trip:

• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
  – Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
• Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports
• Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
• Check the audio settings (volume)

After a trip:

- Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).

- Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).

- The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner's Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

Red Warning Lights

—SeatBeltReminderWarningLight

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information.

—AirBagWarningLight

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BRAKE —BrakeWarningLight

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed.It willtakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhavea collision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

● —VehicleSecurityWarningLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

—EngineCoolantTemperatureWarningLight

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

—BatteryChargeWarningLight

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

—OilPressureWarningLight

This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

H—ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

●! —ElectricPowerSteeringFaultWarningLight

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to "Power Steering" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedassistcouldposea safetyrisktoyourselfandothers.Serviceshouldbe obtainedassoonaspossible.

—TrailerBrakeDisconnectedWarningLight

This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.

—DoorOpenWarningLight

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.

Yellow Warning Lights

EngineCheck/MalfunctionIndicatorWarning Light(MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition

is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMalfunctionIndicator Light(MIL)oncouldcausedamagetothevehicle controlsystem.Italsocouldaffectfueleconomyand driveability.IftheMILisflashing,severecatalytic converterdamageandpowerlosswillsoonoccur. Immediateserviceisrequired.

—ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)Active WarningLight—IfEquipped

This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The "ESC Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

- The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

OFF—ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)OffWarning Light—IfEquipped

This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

—LowWasherFluidWarningLight—If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

(!)—TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS) WarningLight

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Donotcontinuedrivingwithoneormoreflattiresas handlingmaybecompromised.Stopthevehicle, avoidingsharpbrakingandsteering.Ifatirepuncture occurs,repairimmediatelyusingthededicatedtire repairkitandcontactanauthorizeddealerassoonas possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginaleequipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresandwarning havebeenestablishedforthetiresizeequippedon yourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensor

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

damagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize,type,and/orstyle. Aftermarketwheelscancausesensordamage.Using aftermarkettiresealantsmaycausetheTirePressure MonitoringSystem(TPMS)sensorobecomeinoperable.Afterusinganaftermarktiresealantitis recommendedthatyoutakeyourvehicletoyourauthorizeddealertohaveyoursensorfunctionchecked.

Gas —LowFuelIndicatorLight

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

—Anti-LockBrake(ABS)WarningLight

This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

—LowCoolantLevelWarningLight

This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.

—LooseFuelFillerCapWarningLight—If uipped

This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

—Service4WDWarningLight—IfEquipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.

Yellow Indicator Lights

—AirSuspensionPayloadProtectionIndicator ght—IfEquipped

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to “protect” the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.

—AirSuspensionOff-Road1IndicatorLight—quipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting. For further information, refer to "Air Suspension System" in "Starting And Operating."

—AirSuspensionOff-Road2IndicatorLight—quipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting. For further information, refer to "Air Suspension System" in "Starting And Operating".

200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

/AERAirSuspensionAerodynamicHeight IndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Aerodynamic setting.

AirSuspensionRideHeightRaisingIndicator Light—IfEquipped

This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.

—AirSuspensionRideHeightLowering IndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.

—CargoLight—IfEquipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo light button on the head-light switch.

4WD —4WDIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

4WD LOW —4WD Low Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.

Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

AirSuspensionEntry/ExitIndicatorLight—If Equipped

This light comes on when the vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height position downward for easy entry and exit of the vehicle.

TOW/HAUL —TOW/HAULIndicatorLight

This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.

- Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to oil over, come in contact with hot engine exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

Green Indicator Lights

—Park/HeadlightOnIndicatorLight

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

≠0—FrontFogIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

←→—TurnSignalIndicatorLights

When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

—SpeedControlSETIndicatorLight—If EquippedWith7InchInstrumentClusterDisplay

This light will turn on when the speed control is set.

Refer to "Speed Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4WD AUTO —4WDAUTOIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.

For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating."

White Indicator Lights

—CruiseControlReadyIndicator

This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control is ready, but not set.

—SpeedControlSETIndicatorLight—If EquippedWith3.5InchInstrumentClusterDisplay

This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer to "Speed Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

2—HillDescentControl(HDC)IndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the "4WD LOW" position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.

Blue Indicator Lights

ID—HighBeamIndicatorLight

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddriveability.The vehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissionstests canbeperformed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediately service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLYanaauthorizedservicetechniciansshouldconnect equipmenttotheOBDIIconnectionportinorderto readtheVIN,diagnose,orserviceyourvehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Bepossible that vehiclesystems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or assof vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access,orallowotherstoaccess,informationstored inyourvehiclesystems,includingpersonalinformation.

For further information, refer to "Cybersecurity" in "Multimedia".

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the

OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
2. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

- The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

- The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is nowready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

SAFETY

CONTENTS

■SAFETY FEATURES....208

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....208

□Electronic Brake Control System .....209

■AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .....221

□Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .....221

■OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .....227

□Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....227

□Important Safety Precautions....227

□Seat Belt Systems....228

□Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .....241

□Child Restraints....259

□Transporting Pets....285

■SAFETY TIPS....285

□Transporting Passengers....285

□Exhaust Gas....286

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....286

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....289

SAFETY FEATURES

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop).
  • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• TheABScontainssophisticatedelectronicequipmentthatmaybesusceptibletointerferencecaused byimproperlyinstalledorhighoutputradiotransmittingequipment. Thisinterferencecancausepossible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation ofsuchequipmentshouldbeperformed byqualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• TheABScannotpreventthenaturallawsofphysics fromactingonthevehicle,norcanitincreasebrakingorsteeringefficiencybeyondthataffordedbythe conditionofthevehiclebrakesandtiresorthe tractionafforded.
• TheABScannotpreventcollisions,includingthose resultingfromexcessivespeedinturns,following anothervehicletooclosely,orhydroplaning.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- The capabilities of an AB equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-LockBrakeWarningLight

The yellow "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).

ElectronicBrakeForceDistribution(EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

BrakeSystemWarningLight

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

210 SAFETY

If the "Brake System Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the "Brake System Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

BrakeAssistSystem(BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the naturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the extraction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessives speed inturns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

HillStartAssist(HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
- Driver door must be closed.
- The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
- The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
- HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.

WARNING!

TheremaybesituationswheretheHillStartAssist (HSA)willnotactivateandslightrollingmayoccur, suchasonminorhillsorwithaloadedvehicle,or whilepullingatrailer.HSAisnotasubstitutefor activatedrivinginvolvement.Itisalwaysthedriver's responsibilitytobeattentivetodistancetootherve- hicles,people,andobjects,andmostimportantlybrake operationtoensuresafeoperationofthevehicleunder allroadconditions.Yourcompleteattentionisalways requiredwhiledrivingtomaintainsafecontrolofyour vehicle.Failuretofollowthesewarningscanresultin acollisionorserioususpersonalinjury.

TowingWithHSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brakes switch. If so, there may not been enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an inclinewhileresuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSAisnotaparkingbrake.Alwaysapplythe parkingbrakefullywhenexitingyourvehicle.Also, becertaintoplacethetransmissioninPARK.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningscanresultina collisionorseriouspersonalinjury.

DisablingAndEnablingHSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display, refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster display, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn to the left.

6. Push the "ESC Off" button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds. The "ESC Off Indicator Light" should turn on and turn off two times.

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

TractionControlSystem(TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

214 SAFETY

Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC) cannot prevent the naturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthevehicle, norcanitincreasethetractionaffordedbyprevailing roadconditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessivespeedin turns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control duetoin appropriate driver input for the conditions. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
• Vehiclemodifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

WARNING!(Continued)

theperformanceoftheESCsystem.Changestothe steeringsystem,suspension,brakingsystem,tire typeandsizeorwheelsizemayadverselyaffectESC performance.Improperlyinflatedandunevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehiclemodificationorpoorvehiclemaintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increasetheriskoflossofvehiclecontrol,vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath.

ESC OperatingModes

NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

PartialOff

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will turn off.

NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.

WARNING!

- Whenin "PartialOff" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except forthelimited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC OffIndicatorLight" will be illuminated. Whenin "PartialOff" mode, the engine power reduction

WARNING!(Continued)

featureofTCSisdisabled, and theenhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

- TrailerSwaycontrol(TSC)isdisabledwhentheESC systemisinthe"PartialOff"mode.

FullOff—IfEquipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the "Full Off" mode, push and hold the "ESC Off" switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch.

NOTE: System may switch from ESC "Full Off" to "Partial Off" mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC "Full Off".

ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so equipped.

WARNING!

• IntheESC"FullOff"mode,theenginetorque reductionandstabilityfeaturesaredisabled.Therefore,enhancedvehiclestabilityofferedbytheESC systemisunavailable.Inanemergencyevasivemaneuver,theESCsystemwillnotengagetoassistin maintainingstability.ESC"FullOff"modeisintendedforoff-highwayoroff-roaduseonly.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasivemaneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC "Full Off" mode only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent then natural law of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

ESCAvitation/MalfunctionIndicatorLightAnd ESCOFFIndicatorLight

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the

"ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

ElectronicRollMitigation(ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in "Full Off" mode (if equipped). Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chancethat wheelliftor rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel liftor rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

TrailerSwayControl(TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

NOTE:TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING!

If TSCactivateswhiledriving, slowthevehicledown, stopatthenarestsafelocation, and adjustthetrailer loadtoeliminatetrailersway.

HillDescentControl(HDC)—IfEquipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDCHasThreeStates:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).

EnablingHDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
  • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.

ActivatingHDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/- . The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

HDCTargetSetSpeeds

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate.
  • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
  •N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
  • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) - If Equipped

NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

DriverOverride

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime.

DeactivatingHDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.

220 SAFETY

DisablingHDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
- The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
- Driver door opens.
- The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
- The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

FeedbackToTheDriver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.

- The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.

WARNING!

HDCisonlyintendedtoassistthedriverincontrolling vehiclespeedwhendescendinghills. Thedrivermust remainattentivetothedrivingconditionsandresponsibleformaintainingasafevehiclespeed.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 6.5^ C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the

TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusing replacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.
• UsingaftermarkettiresealantsmaycausetheTire PressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)sensortobecomeinoperable. Afterusinganaftermarkettire sealantitisrecommendedthatyoutakeyourvehicle toanauthorizeddealershiptohaveyoursensor functionchecked.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressurealways reinstallthevalvestemcap. This will preventmoistureand dirtfromenteringthevalvestem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

PremiumSystem

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages, which display in the instrument cluster
  •Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.

EXAMPLE ONLY

Low Tire PSI

2345 mi

055900259

"LOWTIREPRESSURE"Message

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to its original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

224 SAFETY

ServiceTPMSWarning

If a system fault is detected, the "TPMS Warning Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

EXAMPLE ONLY

055900260

TirePressureMonitorDisplay

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "TPMS Warning Light" will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
  • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
  • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
  • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPM sensor location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an incorrect TPM sensor location, the "TPMS Warning Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable" message in place of the tire pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "TPMS Warning Light" will no longer flash and the tire pressure display screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure values for the correct locations.

VehiclesWithNonMatchingFullSizeSpareOrCompact Spare

• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a "LOW TIRE" message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a pressure value in a different color and an "Inflate to XX" message.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument

cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.

- Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

TirePressureInformationSystem(TPIS)3500Series Trucks

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS).

The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

226 SAFETY

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPIS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications)
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
• Pressure display in the instrument cluster

The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display.

If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
  • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems
  • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to "Child Restraints" in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to "Child Restraints" in this section for further information) should be secured in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the "Customer Assistance" section for customer service contact information.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag. A deployingpassengerfrontairbag can cause deathorserious injury toachild 12 years or younger, including achildinarear-facingchild restraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintintherearseat ofavehiclewitharearseat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem(BeltAlert)

DriverandPassengerBeltAlert(ifequipped)

3 BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

InitialIndication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlertWarningSequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

230 SAFETY

ChangeofStatus

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagsworkwith yourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.Insome collisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall.Always wearyourseatbelteventhoughyouhaveairbags.
• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredor killed.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.Occupants,includingthe driver,shouldalwaysweartheirseatbeltswhether ornotanairbagisalsoprovidedattheirseating positiontominimizetheriskofsevereinjuryor deathintheeventofacrash.
• Wearingyourseatbeltincorrectlycouldmakeyour injuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmightsuffer internalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideoutofthe seatbelt.Followtheseinstructionstowearyourseat beltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.
• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingleseat belt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintooneanotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly.Never usealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformorethanone person,nomatterwhattheirsize.

WARNING!

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof injuryinacollision.Theseatbeltforceswon'tbeat thestronghipandpelvicbones,butacrossyour abdomen.Alwayswearthelappartofyourseatbelt aslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.
• Atwistedseatbeltmaynotprotectyouproperly. In a collision, it could devencut into you. Besuretheseat beltis flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straightenase at beltiny our vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• Aseatbeltthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncouldride toohighonyourbody, possiblycausinginternal injuries. Alwaysbuckleyourseatbeltintothe bucklenearestyou.
• Aseatbeltthatistooloosewillnotprotectyou properly.Inasuddenstop,youcouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.
• Aseatbeltthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck

WARNING!(Continued)

injury.Aseatbeltwornunderthearmcancause internalinjuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongasshoulder bones.Weartheseatbeltoveryourshouldersothat yourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

- Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

- Afrayedortornseatbeltcouldripapartinacollision andleaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspecttheseat beltsystemperiodically,checkingforcuts,frays,or looseparts.Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Donotdisassembleormodifytheseatbelt system.Seatbeltassembliesmustbereplacedaftera collision.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and belt drive mechanism (no text or symbols)

PullingOutTheLatchPlate

1. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

SAFETY 233

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and belt drive mechanism (no text or symbols)

InsertingLatchPlateIntoBucklePositioningTheLapBelt

1. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

2. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

3. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

234 SAFETY

Lap/ShoulderBeltUntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearingyourseatbeltincorrectlycouldmakeyour injuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmightsuffer internalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideoutofthe seatbelt.Followtheseinstructionstowearyourseat beltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.
• Positiontheshoulderbeltacrosstheshoulderand chestwithminimal,ifanyslacksothatitiscomfortableandnotrestingonyourneck. Theretractorwill withdrawanyslackintheshoulderbelt.
• Misadjustmentoftheseatbeltcouldreducethe effectivenessofthesafetybeltinacrash.

FirstRowCenterSeatBeltOperatingInstructions (RegularCabOnly)

The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position on the seat.

236 SAFETY

Diagram of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a hand, showing two black arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

Mini-LatchAndMini-BuckleConnected

1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

2. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."

4. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

5. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

6. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

7. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

8. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

9. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

WARNING!

- Ifthemini-latchplateandmini-bucklearenotproperlyconnectedwhentheseatbeltisusedbyan occupant,theseatbeltwillnotbeabletoprovide properrestraintandwillincreasetheriskofinjuryin acollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenreattachingthemini-latchplateandmini-buckle,ensuretheseatbeltwebbingisnottwisted. Ifthewebbingistwisted,followthepreceding proceduretodetachthemini-latchplateandmini-buckle,untwistthewebbing,andreattachthemini-latchplateandmini-buckle.

FirstRowCenterLapBeltOperatingInstructions—IfEquipped

The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.

To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.

(Continued)

SeatBeltExtender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLYuseaSeatBeltExtenderifitisphysically requiredinordertoproperlyfittheoriginalseatbelt system.DONOTUSEtheSeatBeltExtenderif, whenworn,thedistancebetweenthefrontedge of theSeatBeltExtenderbuckleandthecenterofthe occupant'sbodyisLESSthan6inches.
• UsingaSeatBeltExtenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofseriousinjuryordeathina collision.OnlyusetheSeatBeltExtenderwhenthe lapbeltisnotlongenoughandonlyuseinthe recommendedseatingpositions.Removeandstore theSeatBeltExtenderwhennotneeded.

SeatBeltsAndPregnantWomen

0228098654US

PregnantWomenAndSeatBelts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

SeatBeltPretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

EnergyManagementFeature

The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

SwitchableAutomaticLockingRetractors(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

0502117859US

RegularCabAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

0502117860US

QuadCab/MegaCab/CrewCabAutomaticLocking Retractor(ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in

this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag.Adeployingpassengerfrontairbagcan causedethorseriousinjurytoachild12yearsor younger,includingachildinarear-facingchild restraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintintherearseat ofavehiclewitharearseat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Theseatbeltassemblymustbereplacedifthe switchableAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnotworking properlywhencheckedaccordingtotheprocedures intheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacetheseatbeltassemblycouldincreaseetheriskofinjuryincollisions.

WARNING!(Continued)

• DonotusetheAutomaticLockingModetorestrain occupantswhoarewearingtheseatbeltorchildren whoareusingboosterseats. Thelockedmodeisonly usedtoinstallrear-facingorforward-facingchild restraintsthathaveaharnessforrestrainingthe child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

AirBagSystemComponents

•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

242 SAFETY

•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
- Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
- Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
- Seat Belt Pretensioners

AirBagWarningLight

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the

ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrument panelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbagsystemto protectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcomeon asabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirsttturnedon, staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomesonas youdrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicetheairbag systemimmediately.

FrontAirBags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.

FrontAirBag/KneeBolsterLocations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

- Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringfrontairbagdeploymentcouldcause seriousinjury,includingdeath.Airbagsneedroom toinflate.Sitback,comfortablyextendingyourarms toreachthesteeringwheelorinstrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag. A deployingpassengerfrontairbag can cause deathorserious injury toachild 12 years or younger, including achildinarear-facing child restraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintintherearseat ofvehiclewitharearseat.

DriverAndPassengerFrontAirBagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheairbag ontheinstrumentpanelorsteeringwheelbecause anysuchobjectscouldcauseharmifthevehicleisin acollisionsevereenoughtocausetheairbagto inflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbagcovers orattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmaydamage theairbagsandyoucouldbeinjuredbecausetheair bagsmaynolongerbefunctional.Theprotective coversfortheairbagcushionsaredesignedtoopen onlywhentheairbagsareinflating.
• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagsworkwith yourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.Insome collisions,airbagswon'tdeployatall.Alwayswear yourseatbeltseventhoughyouhaveairbags.

FrontAirBagOperation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Donotdrill, cut, ortamper with the knee impact bolstersinany way.
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneeimpact bolsterssuchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenband radios, etc.

246 SAFETY

SupplementalSideAirBags

Ram1500

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and

with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandtheSideAirBags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains(SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain(SABIC) LabelLocation

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

• Donotmountequipment,orstackluggageorother cargouphighenoughtoblockthedeploymentofthe SABICs. Thetrimcoveringabovethesidewindows wheretheSABICanditsdeploymentpatharelocatedshouldremainfreefromanyobstructions.
• InorderfortheSABICstoworkasintended, donot installanyaccessoryitemsinyourvehiclewhich couldaltertheroof.Donotaddanaftermarket sunrooftoyourvehicle.Donotaddroofracksthat requirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)for installationonthevehicleroof.Donotdrillintothe roofofthevehicleforanyreason.

SideImpacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up again for very closeto Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean onorsleep against the door, sidewindows, or are a where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seatbelts(and childrestraintswhereappropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against these seats. Children must be properly restrained in child restraintor booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• SideAirBagsneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoororwindow.Situprightinthecenter oftheseat.
• BeingtooclosetotheSideAirBagsduringdeploymentcouldcauseyoutobeseverelyinjuredorkilled.
• RelyingontheSideAirBagsalonecouldleadto moresevereinjuriesinacollision.TheSideAirBags workwithyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,SideAirBagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbelteventhoughyouhave SideAirBags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

250 SAFETY

RolloverEvents

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags may not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.

Depending on the version of software in your vehicle, the Side Air Bags may deploy in one of the following ways:

1. A slower-developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.

Or

1. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Ram2500And3500

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SABs)—If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs), please refer to the information below.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and

with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandtheSideAirBags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains(SABICs)—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs), please refer to the information below.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

252 SAFETY

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain(SABIC) LabelLocation

SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if

they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

• Donotmountequipment,orstackluggageorother cargouphighenoughtoblockthedeploymentofthe SABICs.Thetrimcoveringabovethesidewindows wheretheSABICanditsdeploymentpatharelocatedshouldremainfreefromanyobstructions.
• InorderfortheSABICstoworkasintended, donot installanyaccessoryitemsinyourvehiclewhich couldaltertheroof.Donotaddanaftermarket sunrooftoyourvehicle.Donotaddroofracksthat requirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)for installationonthevehicleroof.Donotdrillintothe roofofthevehicleforanyreason.

SideImpacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up again for very closeto Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean onorsleep against the door, sidewindows, or are a where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seatbelts(and childrestraintswhereappropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against these seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• SideAirBagsneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoororwindow.Situprightinthecenter oftheseat.
• BeingtooclosetotheSideAirBagsduringdeploymentcouldcauseyoutobeseverelyinjuredorkilled.
• RelyingontheSideAirBagsalonecouldleadto moresevereinjuriesinacollision.TheSideAirBags workwithyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,SideAirBagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbelteventhoughyouhave SideAirBags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

RolloverEvents

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags may not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.

Depending on the version of software in your vehicle, the Side Air Bags may deploy in one of the following ways:

1. A slower-developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing rollover event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.

Or

1. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

AirBagSystemComponents

NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
- Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
- Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
- Seat Belt Pretensioners

IfADeploymentOccurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

256 SAFETY

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags,seat beltpretensioners,andtheseatbeltretractorassembliesreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerimmediately. Also,havetheOccupantRestraintControllerSystem servicedaswell.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:

•Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
- Brake booster
• Electric park brake
•Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
- Front wiper
•Headlamp washer pump

NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, please see an authorized dealer.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystemReset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

MaintainingYourAirBagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystemcould causeittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcouldbe injurediftheairbagsystemisnottheretoprotect you.Donotmodifythecomponentsorwiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesorstickerstothe steeringwheelhubtrimcoverortheupperpassenger sideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donotmodifythefront bumper,vehiclebodystructure,oraddaftermarket sidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartoftheairbag systemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewhoworkson yourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.
• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bags systems service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, need to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), takethe vehicle to an authorized

WARNING!(Continued)

dealer.Onlymanufacturerapprovedseataccessories maybeused.Ifitisnecessarytomodifytheairbag systemforpersonswithdisabilities,contactanauthorizeddealer.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  •How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to hold even an infant on your lap could be comes of great that you could no hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicles should be a proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

260 SAFETY

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

- Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

NOTE:

- For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1-888-327-4236

SummaryOfRecommendationsForRestrainingChildrenInVehicles

	ChildSize,Height,WeightOrAge	RecommendedTypeOfChildRestraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint		Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint		Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt		Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

InfantAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag.Adeployingpassengerfrontairbagcan causedeathorseriousinjurytoachild12yearsor younger,includingachildinarear-facingchild restraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintintherearseat ofavehiclewitharearseat.

WARNING!

Donotinstallarear-facingcarseatusingarearsupport leginthisvehicle. Thefloorofthisvehicleisnot designedtomanagethecrashforcesofthistypeofcar seat.Inacrash,thesupportlegmaynotfunctionasit wasdesignedbythecarseatmanufacturer,andyour childmaybemoreseverelyinjuredasaresult.

3D illustration of a car seat with diagonal lines indicating crossed safety or clearance zones (no text or symbols)

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofaninfant orchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseinacollision. Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.Follow thechildrestraintmanufacturer'sdirectionsexactly wheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Afterachildrestraintisinstalledinthevehicle,do notmovethevehicleseatforwardorrearwardbecauseitcanloosenthechildrestraintattachments. Removethechildrestraintbeforeadjustingthevehicleseatposition.Whenthevehicleseathasbeen adjusted,reinstallthechildrestraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with these seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In sudden stop or accident, it could strik the occupants or seat backs and causes serious personal injury.

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

264 SAFETY

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Neverallowachildtoputtheshoulderbeltunderan armorbehindtheirback.Inacrash,theshoulderbelt willnotprotectachildproperly,whichmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.Achildmustalwayswearboth thelapandshoulderportionsoftheseatbeltcorrectly.

RecommendationsForAttachingChildRestraints

RestraintTypeCombined	UseAnyAttachmentMethodShownWithAn“X”Below
	LATCH-Lower AnchorsOnly	SeatBeltOnlyLATCH-Lower Anchors+Top TetherAnchor	SeatBelt+Top TetherAnchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X

LowerAnchorsAndTethersForCHILDREN(LATCH) RestraintSystem

022668173

LATCHLabel

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three

vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

266 SAFETY

LATCHPositionsForInstallingChildRestraintsIn ThisVehicle

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front, rear, and side views (no text or symbols)

0502117857US

RegularCabLATCHPositions

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no text or symbols

0502117863US

Crew/MegaCabs60/40SplitBenchLATCHPositions

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorage Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no text or symbols

QuadCab60/40SplitBenchLATCHPositions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorage Per Seating Position)

Top-down line drawing of a car showing its rear seats and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Quad/CrewCabsFullBenchLATCHPositions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
- Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorage Per Seating Position)

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithLATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use	the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-tem once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

268 SAFETY

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithLATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No Do not use	the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner's manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?	No Quad Cab	or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No	Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes	The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each seating position.

LocatingTheLATCHAnchorage

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly with two black arrows indicating downward movement (no text or symbols)

QuadCab/MegaCab/CrewCabRearOutboardSeats DriverSide

LocatingTheUpperTetherAnchorage

Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats. Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.

RegularCabTetherAnchorage(BehindCovers)

1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor

270 SAFETY

Line drawing of a car seatbelt seat with a black arrow pointing to the backrest (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard with seatbelt and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

CrewOrQuadCabOutboardTetherAnchorageCrewOrQuadCabCenterTetherAnchorageWithHead RestraintInRaisedPosition

MegaCabTetherAnchorage(BehindCovers)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

CenterSeatLATCH

RegularCab, QuadCab, Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorage Available

WARNING!

• Donotinstallachildrestraintinthecenterposition usingtheLATCHsystem. ThispositionisnotapprovedforinstallingchildseatsusingtheLATCH attachments. Youmustusetheseatbeltandtether anchortoinstallachildseatinthecenterseating position.
• Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.
• Pleasereferto"ToInstallALATCH-Compatible ChildRestraint"fortypicalinstallationinstructions.

MegaCabOrCrewCabSplitBenchRearSeat:Center LATCHAnchorageAvailable

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.Pleasereferto"ToInstallALATCH-CompatibleChildRestraint"fortypicalinstallationinstructions.

Always follow the direction of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraints system will be installed as described here.

ToInstallALATCH-CompatibleChildRestraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

1. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
3. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

HowToStowAnUnusedSwitchable-ALR(ALR) SeatBelt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofthere-straint. Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled. Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer'sdirections exactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Childrestraintanchoragesaredesignedtowithstand onlythoseloadsimposedbycorrectly-fittedchild restraints.Undernocircumstancesaretheytobe usedforadultseatbelts,harnesses,orforattaching otheritemsorequipmenttothevehicle.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheVehicleSeat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationorfailuretoproperlysecurea childrestraintcanleadtofailureoftherestraint.The childcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both

types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description in "Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)" under "Occupant Restraint Systems" for additional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint's belt path.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/ShoulderBeltSystemsForInstallingChild RestraintsInThisVehicle

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing air control panel and ventilation grille (no text or symbols)

0502117859US

RegularCabAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

0502117860US

QuadCab/MegaCab/CrewCabAutomaticLocking Retractor(ALR)Locations

Cinching Latchplate = Cinching Latchplate ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithSeatBelts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint	Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

276 SAFETY

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithSeatBelts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	Yes – Cinching Latch Plate No – ALR	In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

InstallingAChildRestraintWithASwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationorfailuretoproperlysecurea childrestraintcanleadtofailureoftherestraint.The childcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. ForCrew, Mega, AndQuadCabModels

Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

ForRegularCabModels

Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep the child as far from the passenger air bag as possible.

1. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
3. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
4. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

5. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

6. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

7. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

InstallingAChildRestraintWithACinchingLatch Plate(CINCH)—IfEquipped:

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationorfailuretoproperlysecurea childrestraintcanleadtofailureoftherestraint.The childcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

• Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

• Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
• Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
• If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
• Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage

WARNING!

Donotattachatetherstrapforarear-facingcarseatto anylocationinfrontofthecarseat,includingtheseat frameoratetheranchorage.Onlyattachthetether strapofarear-facingcarseattothetetheranchorage thatisapprovedforthatseatingposition,located

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

behindthetopofthevehicleseat.Seethesection "LowerAnchorsandTethersforCHildren(LATCH) RestraintSystem" forthelocationofapprovedtether anchoragesinyourvehicle.

RegularAndMegaCabTrucks:

In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.

280 SAFETY

RegularCabTetherAnchorage

1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.

2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

MegaCabTetherAnchorage

WARNING!

Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag.AdeployingPassengerFrontAirBagcancause deathorseriousinjurytoachild12yearsoryounger, includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.

QuadCabOrCrewCabTrucks:

The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint.

RightOrLeftOutboardSeats:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Line drawing of a car backrest and seat assembly (no text or symbols)

HeadRestraintInRaisedPosition

Line drawing of a car interior showing the rear seat, front seats, and a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapLoopWithCenterHeadRestraintInRaised Position

1. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.

282 SAFETY

1. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt seat with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapThroughOutboardTetherStrapLoop

1. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Line drawing of a car backrest and seat assembly, showing two black arrows pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapThroughOutboardTetherStrapLoopAnd AttachedToCenterTetherStrapLoop

NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats.

CenterSeat:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapLoopWithHeadRestraintInRaisedPosition

1. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat.

2. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapThroughCenterTetherStrapLoop

284 SAFETY

1. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seats, frontview, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapThroughCenterTetherStrapLoopAnd AttachedToOutboardTetherStrapLoop

InstallingThreeChildRestraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route the tether straps following the directions for right and left seating positions, above.

2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.

3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position, above.

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions, tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap.

Interior view of a car with seats and overhead air ducts, no visible text or symbols

OutboardAndCenterSeatingPositionsShown

WARNING!

• Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectlybehindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, makes sure the ether strap does not slip into the opening between these at backs as you removes lack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriously injuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They containcarbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO), follow the safety tips:

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomoveyour vehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate/reard oorsopen, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch isset athigh speed. DONOT usethere circulation mode.
• Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcoolingcontrolstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Setthe blowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

AirBagWarningLight

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

Refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Animproperlyattached,damaged,folded,orstacked floormat,ordamagedfloormatfastenersmaycause yourfloormattointerferewiththeaccelerator,brake, orclutchpedalsandcausealossofvehiclecontrol.To preventSERIOUSINJURYorDEATH:

- ALWAYSsecurelyattach yourfloormatusingthe floormatfasteners.DONOTinstallyourfloormat upsidedownorturnyourfloormatover.Lightlypull toconfirmmatissecuredusingthefloormatfastenersonaregularbasis.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• ALWAYSREMOVETHEEXISTINGFLOORMAT FROMTHEVEHICLE 📋 beforeinstallinganyother floormat.NEVERinstallorstackanadditionalfloor matontopofanexistingfloormat.
• ONLYinstallfloormatsdesignedtofityourvehicle. NEVERinstallafloormatthatcannotbeproperly attachedandsecuredtoyourvehicle.Ifafloormat needstobereplaced,onlyuseaFCAapprovedfloor matforthespecificmake,model,andyearofyour vehicle.
• ONLYYusethedriver'ssidefloormatonthedriver's sidefloorarea.Tocheckforinterference,withthe vehicleproperlyparkedwiththeengineoff,fully depresstheaccelerator,thebrake,andtheclutch pedal(ifpresent)tocheckforinterference.Ifyour floormatinterfereswiththeoperationofanypedal, orisnotsecuretothefloor,removethefloormat fromthevehicleandplacethefloormatinyour trunk.
• ONLYusethepassenger'ssidefloormatonthe passenger'ssidefloorarea.

WARNING!(Continued)

• ALWAYSmakesureobjectscannotfallorslideinto thedriver'ssidefloorareawhenthevehicleis moving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderaccelerator,brake,orclutchpedalsandcouldcausealossof vehiclecontrol.
• NEVERplaceanyobjectsunderthefloormat(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). Theseobjectscouldchangethe positionofthefloormatandmaycauseinterference with the accelerator, brake, or clutchpedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor at fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depresse each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedal sthenre - install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floormats. After cleaning, always check your floormath as been properly installed and is secured by your vehicle using the floormat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE....296

□Automatic Transmission....296

□Tip Start Feature .....297

□Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition....297

☐Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP Button....297

□Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . .301

□If Engine Fails To Start....301

☐Cold Weather Operation (Below -22^ F Or -30^ C) .....302

□After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

■ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .302

■ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .303

■PARKING BRAKE....303

■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .....305

□ Key Ignition Park Interlock....307

□Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .307

☐Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....307

☐Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models Only (If Equipped) .....315

☐Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 Models Only .324

■FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED....333

□Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped . .333

□Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

□Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

☐Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped....346

☐Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped .....350

■AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED....354

□Description....354

□Air Suspension Modes....357

□Instrument Cluster Display Messages. . . . . . . . .358

□Operation....358

■AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED....360

□Description....360

□Air Suspension Modes....362

□Instrument Cluster Display Messages. . . . . . . . .363

□Operation....364

■ AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED....365

□Description....365

□Air Suspension Modes....367

□Instrument Cluster Display Messages. . . . . . . . .368

□Operation....368

■AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

☐Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics....372

□ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

□Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points) .....375

□Hill Climbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

□ Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

□Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . .381
□Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
□After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

■LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL....386

■WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)....386

□Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . . .386
□Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . . .388
□Winch Accessories....389
□Operating Your Winch....390
□Rigging Techniques....401

■POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

□Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models .....402
□Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models....403

■FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES ONLY — IF EQUIPPED....404

■SPEED CONTROL....404

□To Activate....405
□To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
□To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
□To Accelerate For Passing....407
□To Resume Speed....407
□To Deactivate....407

■PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED....408

□ParkSense Sensors....408
□ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
□ParkSense Display....409
□Enabling And Disabling ParkSense....412
□Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .412
□Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
□ ParkSense System Usage Precautions....413

■PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .....415

□ParkSense Sensors....415

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

□ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
□ParkSense Display....416
□Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense....418
□Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .418
□Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
□ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .....419

■PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED .....421

■REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE . . .424

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .....425

■VEHICLE LOADING....425

□Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .....425

□Payload. 425

□Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .....426

□Tire Size....426

□Rim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

□Inflation Pressure....426

□Curb Weight....426
□Loading....426

■TRAILER TOWING....427

□Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
□Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight....433
□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)....434
□Trailer And Tongue Weight....434
□ Towing Requirements .....435
□Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

■SNOWPLOW....444

□1500 Models Only....444

□2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

■RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .....447

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle....447

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

□Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models....448
□Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models....448

■DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

□Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
□Driving Through Water....453
□Off-Road Driving Tips....454

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.

The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe keylessignitionnodeisinthe"OFF"mode,remove thekeyfobfromthevehicleandlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousforanumber ofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednotto touchtheparkingbrake,brakepedalorthegear selector.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle,orinalocationaccessibletochildren,anddonotleavetheignitionofvehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode.Achildcould

WARNING!(Continued)

operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethe vehicle.

- Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

Automatic Transmission

Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.

NOTE:

• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
• If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in "In Case Of Emergency".

Tip Start Feature

Donotpress the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The starter motor will continue to run and will automatically disengage when the engine is running.

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

graph TD
    A["ENGINE START STOP"] --> B["ACC"]
    B --> C["RUN"]
    C --> D["OFF"]
    D --> A

0101113902US

KeylessPushButtonIgnition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger compartment.

Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP Button

ToTurnOnTheEngineUsingTheENGINESTART/STOPButton

1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

To TurnOffTheEngineUsingENGINESTART/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display a "VehicleNotInPark" message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.

ENGINESTART/STOPButtonFunctions—WithDriver'sFootOFFTheBrakePedal(InPARKOrNEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these directions:

1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.

AutoPark—RotaryShifterand8-SpeedTransOnly

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.

WARNING!

• Driverinattentioncouldleadtofailuretoplacethe vehicleinPARK.ALWAYSDOAVISUALCHECK thatyourvehicleisinPARKbyverifyingthatasolid (notblinking)"P"isindicatedintheInstrument ClusterDisplayandnearthegaselector.Ifthe"P" indicatorisblinking,yourvehicleisnotinPARK.As anaddedprecaution,alwaysapplytheparkingbrake whenexitingthevehicle.
• AutoParkisasupplementalfeature.Itisnotdesignedtoreplacetheneedtoshiftyourvehicleinto PARK.Itisabackupsystemandshouldnotbe relieduponastheprimarymethodbywhichthe drivershiftsthevehicleintoPARK.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may Auto Park.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
- Ignition switched from RUN to ACC

NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.

IfthevehicleisnotinPARKandthedriverexitsthe vehiclewiththeengine running,thevehiclemayAutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission
  • Vehicle is not in PARK
  • Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver's seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver's door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed

The MESSAGE "AutoParkEngagedShifttoPthenShift toGear" will display in the instrument cluster.

NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the “AutoParkEngagedShifttoPthenShifttoGear” to not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.

IfthedrivershiftsintoPARKwhilemoving,thevehicle mayAutoPark.

AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.

The MESSAGE "VehicleSpeedisTooHightoShiftto P" will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).

WARNING!

If vehiclespeedis above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicles speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking braking when exiting the vehicle.

4WDLOW—IfEquipped

AutoParkwillbedisabledwhenoperatingthevehiclein 4WDLOW.

The MESSAGE "AutoPark Disabled" will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will begin when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver's Door is ajar
  • Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range

The MESSAGE “AutoParkNotEngaged” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is closed.

ALWAYSDOAVISUALCHECKthat your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the Instrument Cluster Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only

This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set period of time when the engine is at operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes. See your local authorized dealer to enable this feature.

NOTE: The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO is active.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

WARNING!

• Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidintothe throttlebodyairinletopeninginanattempttostart thevehicle. Thiscouldresultinflashfirecausing seriouspersonalinjury.
• Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatictransmissioncannotbestartethisway.Unburnedfuel couldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncethe enginehasstarted,igniteanddamagetheconverter andvehicle.
• If the vehicle has adischarged battery, boostercables maybe used to obtain a start from abooster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Referto "Jump Starting Procedure" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrank the engineformorethan10secondsatatime. Wait10to15 secondsbeforetryingagain.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the ignition button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Cold Weather Operation (Below -22°F Or -30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

1500Models

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly. It is located between the front grill and the radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.

2500/3500Models

The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook.

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months. During winter months, remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheatercord beforedriving. Damagetothe110-115Voltelectrical cordcouldcauseelectrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as required.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

ParkingBrakeRelease

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

- When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

- This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakefully whenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementand possibleinjuryordamage.

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinvehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle.Leavingunattended childreninvehicleisdangerousforanumberof reasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatally injured.

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle,orinalocationaccessibletochildren,anddonotleavea vehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Gointhe ACCorON/RUNmode.Achildcouldoperatepower windows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengagedbefore driving;failuretodosocanleadtobrakefailureand acollision.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleaving yourvehicleoritmayrollandcausedamageor injury. Also, becertaintoleavethetransmissionin PARK. Failuretodosomaycausethevehicletoroll andcausedamageorinjury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Lightremainson with the parkingbrakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunction is indicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than needles speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles,you shouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwayscometoa completestop,thenapplytheparkingbrake,shift thetransmissionintoPARK,turntheengineOFF, andremovethekeyfob.Whentheignitionisinthe LOCK/OFF(keyremoval)position,(or,withKeyless Enter-N-Go,whentheignitionisintheOFFmode) thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securingthe vehicleagainstunwantedmovement.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFmode,removethekeyfobfrom thevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakefully whenexitingthevehicletoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothersif itisnotinPARK.Checkbytryingtomovethegear selectoroutofPARKwiththebrakepedalreleased. MakesurethetransmissionisinPARKbeforeexitingthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento beinavehicleunattended is dangerous for an number of reasons. Achildorotherscould beseriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(orinalocationaccessibletochildren),anddonotleave theignition(inavehicleequippedwithKeyless Enter-N-Go)intheACCorON/RUNmode.Achild couldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,or movethevehicle.

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowing precautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintooroutofPARKorREVERSEonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestop.
• DonotshiftbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, orDRIVEwhentheengineisaboveidlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfootis firmlypressingthebrakepedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running, for vehicles with eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the instrument panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

GearRanges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkbrakefullywhen exitingthevehicletoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothersif itisnotinPARK.Checkbytryingtomovethegear selectoroutofPARKwiththebrakepedalreleased. MakesurethetransmissionisinPARKbeforeexitingthevehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a completestop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicates solidly indicates PARK(P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed is higher than needles speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

engineisidlingnormallyandyourfootisfirmly pressingthebrakepedal.

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles,you shouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwayscometoa completestop,thenapplytheparkbrake,shiftthe transmissionintoPARK,turntheengineOFF,and removethekeyfob.Whentheignitionisinthe LOCK/OFF(keyremoval)position(or,withKeyless Enter-N-Go,whentheignitionisintheOFFmode), thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securingthe vehicleagainstunwantedmovement.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFmode,removethekeyfobfrom thevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousforanumber ofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor

WARNING!(Continued)

fatallyinjured. Childrenshouldbewarnednotto touchtheparkbrake, brakepedalorthetransmissiongearselector.

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(orin allocationaccessibletochildren), and donotleave theignition(inavehicleequippedwithKeyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACCorON/RUNmode. Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or movethevehicle.

CAUTION!

• DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfromPARK orNEUTRALintoanothergearrange,asthiscan damagethedrivetrain.
• Beforemoving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damageto the gear selector could result.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafepractices thatlimityourresponsetochangingtrafficorroad conditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthevehicleand haveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"InCaseOfEmergency"for furtherinformation.

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures ( -22^ [-30^] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation—Eight-SpeedTransmission

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available gear.

0601115944US
1 — GEAR - Switch 2 — GEAR + Switch

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+ switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheirgrip andthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

WhentoUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.

TOW/HAULSwitch

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Donotusethe "TOW/HAUL" featurewhendrivingin icyorslipperyconditions. The increased engine braking can cause therear wheelstoslide, and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models Only (If Equipped)

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of the steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK (column shift only).

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) or moving the gear selector to the left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

GearRanges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakefully whenexitingthevehicletoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• YourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothersifitisnotinPARK.Checkbytryingtomovethegear selectoroutofPARKwiththebrakepedalreleased. MakesurethetransmissionisinPARKbeforeexitingthevehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

vehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething.Onlyshiftintogearwhenthe engineisidlingnormallyandyourfootisfirmly pressingthebrakepedal.

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles,you shouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwayscometoa completestop,thenapplytheparkingbrake,shift thetransmissionintoPARK,turntheengineOFF, andremovethekeyfob.Whentheignitionisinthe LOCK/OFF(keyremoval)position(or,withKeyless Enter-N-Go,whentheignitionisintheOFFmode), thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securingthe vehicleagainstunwantedmovement.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFmode,removethekeyfobfrom thevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinvehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousforanumber

WARNING!(Continued)

ofreasons. Achildorotherscouldbeseriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(orin allocationaccessibletochildren), and donotleave theignition(inavehicleequippedwithKeyless Enter-N-Go)intheACCorON/RUNmode.Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or movethevehicle.

CAUTION!

• Beforemovingthetransmissiongearselectoroutof PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also pressthebrakepedal. Otherwise, damagetothe gear selector could result.
• DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfromPARK orNEUTRALintoanothergearrange,asthiscan damagethedrivetrain.

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted gear selector toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way forward and to the left until it stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafepractices thatlimityourresponsetochangingtrafficorroad conditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthevehicleand haveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"InCaseOfEmergency"for furtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

To access all six available gears, you must use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation—Six-SpeedTransmission(1500ModelsOnly)

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears.

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch (column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear selector/switch one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

ColumnGearSelector

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right (+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch (column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheirgrip andthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERSforengine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not too overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position,
- The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
- The engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
•The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

WhenToUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAULSwitch

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Donotusethe"TOW/HAUL"featurewhendrivingin icyorslipperyconditions.Theincreasedenginebrakingcancausetherearwheelstoslide,andthevehicle toswingaroundwiththepossiblelossofvehicle control,whichmaycauseanaccidentpossiblyresultinginpersonalinjuryordeath.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

- The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may

seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

- If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 Models Only

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section for further information). To drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the gear selector) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

GearRanges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakefully whenexitingthevehicletoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• YourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothersifitisnotinPARK.Checkbytryingtomovethegear selectoroutofPARKwiththebrakepedalreleased. MakesurethetransmissionisinPARKbeforeexitingthevehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than needles speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

WARNING!(Continued)

vehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething.Onlyshiftintogearwhenthe engineisidlingnormallyandyourfootisfirmly pressingthebrakepedal.

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles,you shouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwayscometoa completestop,thenapplytheparkingbrake,shift thetransmissionintoPARK,turntheengineOFF, andremovethekeyfob.Whentheignitionisinthe LOCK/OFF(keyremoval)position(or,withKeyless Enter-N-Go,whentheignitionisintheOFFmode), thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securingthe vehicleagainstunwantedmovement.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFmode,removethekeyfobfrom thevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

ofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednotto touchtheparkingbrake,brakepedalorthetransmissiongearselector.

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(orin allocationaccessibletochildren), and donotleave theignition(inavehicleequippedwithKeyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACCorON/RUNmode. Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or movethevehicle.

CAUTION!

• Beforemovingthetransmissiongearselectoroutof PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also pressthebrakepedal. Otherwise, damagetothe gear selector could result.
• DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfromPARK orNEUTRALintoanothergearrange,asthiscan damagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafepractices thatlimityourresponsetochangingtrafficorroad conditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthevehicleand haveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA Disabled Vehicle"in"InCaseOfEmergency"for furtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheirgrip andthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERSforengine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not too overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

•The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
- The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

WhenToUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAULSwitch

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Donotusethe"TOW/HAUL"featurewhendrivingin icyorslipperyconditions.Theincreasedenginebrakingcancausetherearwheelstoslide,andthevehicle toswingaroundwiththepossiblelossofvehicle control,whichmaycauseanaccidentpossiblyresultinginpersonalinjuryordeath.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5km ) of driving]. Because sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case, located in this section for further information.

Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2H

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4H

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

4L

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer to "Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case" in this section for further information.

The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

The "Transfer Case Position Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheNEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingtheparkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRALpositiondisengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfromthe powertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll,evenif thetransmissionisinPARK.Theparkingbrake shouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthdriverisnotinthe vehicle.

ShiftingProcedure—ManuallyShiftedTransfer Case

2HTo4H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

2HOr4HTo4L

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired mode.
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the transmission is in gear.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLight

The "Transfer Case Position Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped

The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

Four-Position/PartTimeTransferCase

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheNEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingtheparkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRALpositiondisengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfromthe powertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll,evenif thetransmissionisinPARK.Theparkingbrake shouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthdriverisnotinthe vehicle.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletoroll,whichmaycausepersonal injury.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

- If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.

- If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDLOCK

Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

2WDOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

Five-Position/On-DemandTransferCase

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
- Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDAUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheNEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingtheparkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRALpositiondisengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfromthe powertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll,evenif thetransmissionisinPARK.Theparkingbrake shouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriverisnotinthe vehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCK

Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

2WDOr4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

- If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process, the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.

- The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

Four-Position/On-DemandTransferCase—EightSpeed TransmissionOnly

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
  • Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The "SVC 4WD Warning Light" monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

- Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRAL(N)positionwithoutfirstfullyengaging theparkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRAL(N) positiondisengagesboththefrontandreardrive shaftfromthepowertrain, andwillallowthevehicle toroll, eveniftheautomatictransmissionisinPARK (ormanualtransmissionisingear). Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- ThetransmissionmaynotengagePARKifthevehicleismoving.Alwaysbringthevehicletoa completestopbeforeshiftingtoPARK,andverify thatthetransmissiongearpositionindicatorsolidly indicatesPARK(P)withoutblinking.Ensurethatthe vehicleiscompletelystopped,andthePARKpositionisproperlyindicated,beforeexitingthevehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

Five-Position/On-DemandTransferCase—EightSpeed TransmissionOnly

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDAUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a

loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The "SVC 4WD Warning Light" monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated.Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

- Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheNEUTRAL(N)positionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRAL(N)positiondisengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftfrom thepowertrain,andwillallowthevehicletoroll,even iftheautomatictransmissionisinPARK(ormanual transmissionisingear).Theparkingbrakeshould alwaysbeappliedwhenthedriverisnotinthevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a completestop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicates solidly indicates PARK(P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).

• NormalRideHeight(NRH)- This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road1(OR1)(Raisesthevehicleapproximately 1in(26mm))- This position should be the primary position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. To enter OR1, push the "Up" button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- Off-Road2(OR2)(Raisesthevehicleapproximately 2in(51mm)) – This position is intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the "Up" button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clear ancerequired for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.

- AeroMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately.6in [15mm])– This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).

NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display when equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio when equipped with Uconnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

- Entry/ExitMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately 2in(51mm))- This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the "Down" button once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, push the "Up" button once while

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE:Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to "Keys" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

WheninENTRY/EXITsetting, be aware of yoursur-roundings, you may nothavetheclearancerequired for certain areas and vehicledamagemayoccur.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user requested changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.

This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle

will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your authorized dealerforservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

AEROMode

To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height automatically. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

Tire/JackMode

To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

TransportMode

For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

ProtectionStrategy

In order to "protect" the air suspension system, the vehicle will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not resume.

NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Instrument Cluster Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected.

See your authorized dealer for system service if normal operation does not resume.

Operation

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are

flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pushing the "Up" button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The "Up" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pushing the "DOWN" button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The "DOWN" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

AirSuspensionSwitch

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).

• NormalRideHeight(NRH)- This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road(OR)(Raisesthevehicleapproximately1in (26mm))- This position is intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR, push the "Up" button once from the NRH position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message will be shown when this occurs. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

IfthevehicleisinOff-Roadsetting,beawareofyour surroundings,youmaynothavetheclearancerequired forcertainareasandvehicledamagemayoccur.

- AeroMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately.6in (15mm))– This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).

NOTE: Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.

- To enter Aero Mode manually push the down button once from NRH at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the up button once while vehicle speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/h).

NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio when equipped with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

- Entry/ExitMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately 3in(73mm))- This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the "Down" button twice from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, push the "Up" button twice while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message will be shown when this occurs. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

WheninENTRY/EXITsetting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clear are required for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user requested changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.

This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

WARNING!

Theairsuspensionsystemusesahighpressurevolumeofairtooperatethesystem.Toavoidpersonal injuryordamagetothesystem,seeyourauthorized dealerforservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

AEROMode

To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height automatically. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

Tire/JackMode

To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

TransportMode

For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

ProtectionStrategy

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not resume.

NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Instrument Cluster Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected.

See your authorized dealer for system service if normal operation does not resume.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

Operation

AirSuspensionSwitch

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to

achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pushing the "Up" button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The "Up" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pushing the "DOWN" button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The "DOWN" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road (OR) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in NRH.
• Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Aero Mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and indicator lamp 4 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the truck's rear ride height level. There are two selectable heights that can be chosen based on your operating conditions.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for all user requested changes and load leveling.

RearLevelingRideHeightSwitch

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

Normal Ride Height (NRH) - This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.

AlternateTrailerHeight(ATH)– Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 in (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used as required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.

TrailerDecoupling/Unloading- The air suspension system will load level (lower/exhaust only) for up to 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck by maintaining the ride height. After 10 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to the run position for the air suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system will remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can be accomplished via the settings menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for Transport Mode.

NOTE:

• Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) when unloaded.
• Refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

IgnitionOFFBehavior

For a predetermined amount of time after the ignition is off the air suspension may adjust to maintain a proper appearance.

WARNING!

Theairsuspensionsystemusesahighpressurevolumeofairtooperatethesystem.Toavoidpersonal injuryordamagetothesystem,seeyourauthorized dealerforservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/JackMode

To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

TransportMode

For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the automatic load leveling system. This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

ProtectionStrategy

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not resume.

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

Instrument Cluster Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected.

See your authorized dealer for system service if normal operation does not resume.

Operation

Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower the vehicle to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the LED.

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the LED will turn off.

Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride Height (NRH) has been achieved.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged, mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.

0601115937US

AxleLockSelector

CAUTION!

• Donotlockthefrontorrearaxleonhardsurfaced roads. The ability to osteer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hardsurfaced roads.
• Donottrytolocktherearaxleifthevehicleisstuck andthetiresarespinning.Youcandamagedrivetrain components.Locktherearaxlebeforeattempting situationsornavigatingterrain,whichcouldpossiblycausethevehicletobecomestuck.

The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.

The switch has three positions:

• AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are unlocked
• REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
• FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are locked

Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position.

NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments.

During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command has been successfully executed, the light will remain on solid.

To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to "Four Wheel Drive Operation" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked.

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.

WARNING!

Donotusethelockedaxlepositionfornormaldriving. Alockedfrontaxleisintendedforoff-roaddriving only. Lockingthefrontaxleduringon-roaddriving willreducethesteeringability. This could cause a collisionandyoumaybeseriouslyinjured.

To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked.

NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock.

To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked.

NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.

To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.

Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach/departure and break over angles.

This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel.

0601115937US

SwayBarDisconnectButtons

The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road. The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving conditions.

WARNING!

Donotdisconnectthestabilizerbaranddriveonhard surfacedroadsoratspeedsabove18mph(29km/h), youmaylosecontrolofthevehicle,whichcouldresult inseriousinjuryordeath.Thefrontstabilizerbar

WARNING!(Continued)

enhancesvehiclestabilityandassistsinmaintaining controlofthevehicle.Thesystemmonitorsvehicle speedandwillattempttoreconnectthestabilizerbar atspeedsover18mph(29km/h).Thisisindicatedbya flashingoffroadlightandsolidonroadlight.Once vehiclespeedisreducedbelow14mph(22km/h),the systemwillattempttoreturntotheOff-Roadmode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in "Four Wheel Drive Operation" and push the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button to obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

To return to the On-Road mode; push the left hand On Road stabilizer/sway bar button.

WARNING!

Ifthestabilizer/swaybarwillnotreturntoOn-Road mode,vehiclestabilityisreduced.Donotattemptto drivethevehicleover18mph(29km/h).Drivingfaster than18mph(29km/h)maycauselossofcontrolofthe vehicle,whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath. Contactyourlocalservicecenterforassistance.

Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics

Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out, you should contact your local governmental agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.

The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails.

SkidPlatesAndUnderbodyProtection

Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road situations that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.

RampTravelIndex(RTI)

The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one front wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground.

WaterFordingCharacteristics

Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability to cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.

CAUTION!

Thedoorsillheightis25inches(63.5cm).Watermay intrudeintotheinteriorofthevehicleatgreater depths.

SimultaneousBrakeAndThrottleOperation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

TheBasicsOfOff-RoadDriving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn't. When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over.

WARNING!

Alwayswearyourseatbeltandfirmlytiedowncargo. Unsecuredcargocanbecomeprojectilesinanoff-road situation.

CAUTION!

Neverparkyourvehicleoverdrygrassorothercombustiblematerials.Theheatfromyourvehicleexhaust systemcouldcauseafire.

WhenToUseLowRange

When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4LO (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI (High Range) traction will not do the job.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the vehicle's momentum.

- Snow– In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low Range) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

Onicyorslipperyroads, donotdownshiftathigh engineRPMsorvehiclespeedsbecauseenginebrakingmaycauseskiddingandlossofcontrol.

• Mud- Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use 4LO (Low Range) with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
• Sand— Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal

air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause unreseating and total loss of air pressure. Toreducether is koftire unseating, while a reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)

While driving off road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!

Crossingobstaclescancauseabruptsteeringsystem loadingwhichcouldcauseyoutoloosecontrolofyour vehicle.

UsingASpotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.

CrossingLargeRocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!

• Neverattempttostraddlearockthatislargeenough tostrikeyouraxlesorundercarriage.
• Neverattempttodriveoverarockwhichislarge enoughtocontactthedoorsills.

CrossingARavine, Gully, Ditch, WashoutOrRut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!

Thereisanincreasedriskofrolloverwhencrossingan obstacle,atanyangle,withsteepsides.

CrossingLogs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTION!

Donotattempttocrossalogwithagreaterdiameter thantherunninggroundclearanceorthevehiclewill becomehighcentered.

GettingHighCentered

If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.

CAUTION!

Winchingorrockingthevehicleoffhardobjectsincreasetheriskofunderbodydamage.

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

- Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4LO (Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first gear and 4LO (Low Range) for very steep hills.

- DrivingUpHill— Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!

Neverattempttoclimbahillatanangleorturnaround onasteepgrade. Drivingacrossaninclineincreases theriskofarollover, which may result in severe injury or death.

- DrivingDownHill– Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually select first gear on automatic transmissions) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

DonotdescendasteepgradeinNEUTRAL.Use vehiclebrakesinconjunctionwithenginebraking. Descendingagradetoofastcouldcauseyoutolose controlandbeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

- DrivingAcrossAnIncline—If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Drivingacrossaninclineincreasestheriskofarollover,whichmayresultinsevereinjury.

- If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

Iftheenginestallsoryouloseheadwayorcannot makeittothetopofasteephillorgrade,neverattempt toturnaround.Todosomayresultintippingand rollingthevehicle,whichmayresultinsevereinjury. AlwaysbackcarefullystraightdownahillinRE-VERSE.NeverbackdownahillinNEUTRALusing onlythevehiclebrakes.Neverdrivediagonallyacross ahill,alwaysdrivestraightupordown.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.

Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.

CAUTION!

Wateringestionintotheaxles,transmission,transfer case,engineorvehicleinteriorcanoccurifyoudrive toofastorthroughtoodeepofwater.Watercancause permanentdamagetoengine,drivelineorothervehiclecomponentsandyourbrakeswillbelesseffectiveoncewetand/ormuddy.

- BeforeYouCrossAnyTypeOfWater– As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be

intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

• CrossingPuddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other

StandingWater– Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.

CAUTION!

Muddywaterscanreducethecoolingsystemeffectivenessbydepositingdebrisontotheradiator.

- CrossingDitches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed determine the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.

WARNING!

Neverdrivethroughfastmovingdeepwater.Itcan pushyourvehicledownstream,sweepingitoutof control.Thiscouldputyouandyourpassengersatrisk ofinjuryordrowning.

Airing Down For Off-Road Driving

Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressure increase estheriskoftired damage and may cause tire unseating with total loss of fair pressure. Toreducetheriskoftire unseating, while at areduced tire pressure, drive at slowerspeeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Vehicle Recovery

If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process? Answering these

questions will help you determine the best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage. This should be tried before attempting any recovery method.

CAUTION!

Pullingthevehicleoffanobstacle, withoutfirstclear-ingtheobject, mayresultinadditionalunderbody damage.

- RockCyclingYourVehicle– Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after each shift. During this process, for additional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no more than a 14 turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction. You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment.

CAUTION!

Damagecanoccurwhenspinningyourtiresatan excessivehighspeed.Donotspinyourtiresfasterthan anindicated30mph(48km/h).

- UsingTheTowHooksWithATowStrap– Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles. There should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 ½ inch hard wood dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.

WARNING!

Neverusetowstrapswithendhooksorlinktwostraps withaclevispin.Theseheavymetalobjectscould becomeprojectilesifastrapbreaks,whichcouldcause severeinjury.Neverleavemorethan2to3feet(.6to 1meter)ofslackinthestrap.Moreslackthanthis greatlyincreasetheriskofinjuryandvehicledamage. Alwayskeepeveryoneatleast30feet(9meters)away fromastrappingorwinchingsituation.

- Winching(ReferTo"WinchOperation"ForAdditional Information)- Winching is most commonly used in the following situations: there is no support vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the

situation in a slow controlled manner. This control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle's weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch's pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it. Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable. Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching.

WARNING!

Winchcablesareunderhightensionwheninuseand canbecomeaprojectileiftheyfail.Neverstandoveror straddlethewinchcable.Neverjerkor overloadthe winchcable.Neverstandinfrontofthevehiclewhile winching.Failuretofollowtheseinstructionscan resultinseriousorfatalinjury.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasivematerialinanypartofthebrakesmaycause excessivewearorunpredictablebraking.Youmight nothavefullbrakingpowerwhenyouneeditto preventacollision.Ifyouhavebeenoperatingyour vehicleindirtyconditions,getyourbrakeschecked andcleanedasnecessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction.

The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction.

WARNING!

Onvehiclesequippedwithalimited-slipdifferential neverruntheenginewithonerearwheeloffthe groundsincethevehiclemaydrivethroughtherear wheelremainingontheground.Youcouldlosecontrol ofthevehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the complete winch owner's manual.

TensioningTheWireRope

The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use. Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:

1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum.

2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.

CAUTION!

Becertaintheanchorwillwithstandtheloadrequired totensionthewirerope.

1. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum.

CAUTION!

Wireropemustspoolonthewinchdruminthe directionindicatedonthedrumrotationdecalonthe winch.

LowVoltageInterrupt

Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch.

WinchMotorThermalProtection

Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive duration, the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.

Understanding The Features Of Your Winch

WinchComponents

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.

2. RemoteSocket: The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function.

3. WinchDrumWithIntegralBrake: The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.

4. 3-StagePlanetaryGearSet: Provides balance between speed and pulling power.
5. WireRope: The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. ClutchLever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. RemoteControl: The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch. The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral (center) position.

CAUTION!

If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the hook.

Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope.

Winch Accessories

The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.

Gloves: Wire rope, through use, will develop "barbs" which can slice skin. It is extremely important to wear protective gloves while operating the winch or handling the wire rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and

other moving parts.

Snatch/BlockPulley:Used properly, the multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1) increase the winch's pulling power; and (2) change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope. Proper use of the snatch block is covered in "Before You Pull."

Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shackle's pin is threaded to allow easy removal.

TreeTrunkProtector: Typically made of tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects, as well as protect living trees.

Operating Your Winch

WARNING!

Failuretoobserveanyofthesewarningsregarding properwinchusagemayresultinsevereinjury.

• Alwaysusesuppliedhookstraptoholdthehook whenspoolingwireropeinorout.
- Neveruseasahoist.
•Neverusetomovepersons.
- Neverexceedwinchorwireroperatedcapacity.
- Alwayswearheavyleathergloveswhenhandling thewirerope.
- Nevertouchwireropeorhookwhileintensionor underload.
- Neverengageordisengageclutchifwinchisunder load, wireropeisintension, or wireropedrumis moving.
• Alwaysstandclearofwireropeandloadandkeep othersawayduringwinching.
- Alwayskeephandsandclothingclearofthewire rope,hookandfairleadopeningduringoperation andwhenspooling.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverwrapwireropebackontoitself.Alwaysusea chokerchain,wirechokerropeortreetrunkprotectorontheanchor.
• Neverattacharecoverystraptothewinchhookto increasethelengthofapull.
• Neverattempttotowavehiclewiththerecovery strapattacheddirectlytothewinchhook.
• Never use "bungee" straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amountsofforcewhen stretched.
• Always disconnecttheremotecontrolwhennotin use.
• Neverwinchwhentherearelessthanfivewrapsof wireropearoundthewinchdrum.
• Alwayspassremotecontrolthroughawindowto avoidpinchingleadindoor,whenusingremote insideavehicle.
• Neverleavetheremotecontrolpluggedintothe winchwhilefreespooling,riggingorsittingidle.

GeneralInformation

Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key points to remember when using your winch are:

• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan your pull carefully.

• Always take your time when using a winch.

- Use the right equipment for the situation.

- Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.

- Only the operator should handle the wire rope and remote control.

- Think safety at all times.

VehicleRecoveryUsingTheWinch

CAUTION!

• AlwaysKnowYourWinch: Takethetimetofully readandunderstandtheincludedInstallationand OperationsGuide, and BasicGuidetoWinching Techniques, inordertounderstandyourwinchand thewinchingoperation.
• Alwaysinspectwinchinstallationandwirerope conditionbeforeoperatingthewinch.Frayed, kinkedordamagedwireropemustbereplaced immediately. Looseordamagedwinchinstallation mustbecorrectedimmediately.
• Alwaysbesureanyelementwhichcaninterferewith safewinchingoperationsisremovedpriortoinitiatingwinching.
  • Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum, wirerope and rigging.
• Inspectforcracks, pinches, frayedwires, or loose connections. Replace if damaged.

• BecarefulnottopulltheWinchCableCollar throughtherollers.WatchandlistentoWinchfor propersnugness.

• Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage.

1. Put on gloves.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

1. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool near a vehicle, with an arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

FreeSpoolHookStrap

1. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap to the hook (if not attached).

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to lift or adjust cable from a car's side panel (no text or symbols)

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you work.

Line drawing of a person spraying a pickup truck (no text or symbols)

0601115965US

PullingWireRope

1. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around the object.

Line drawing of a person watering a tree trunk with a hose (no text or symbols)

0601115970US

TreeTrunkProtector

CAUTION!

Alwaysbecertaintheanchoryouselectwillwithstand theload.

NOTE: Howtochooseananchorpoint: A secure anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power.

1. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop, being careful not to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

Line drawing of two hands tying a rope knot, no text or symbols present

0601115940US

Clevis/D-Shackles

1. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage.

NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged.

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Connect the remote control to the winch control box, located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle, always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a central component and wiring, no visible text or symbols

WinchBoxRemoteControlConnector

1. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well clear of it and never step over it.

Line drawing of a person using a tool to clean or wash the vehicle (no text or symbols)

PullingWireRopeUnderTension

1. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure.

2. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding can cause damage to the wire rope.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical joint or connection (no text or symbols present)

WireNeatlyWoundAroundTheSpoolingDrum

Line drawing of a cylindrical component with a pointed tip, connected by a straight line (no text or symbols)

HeavyBlanketOverWireRope

In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the wire rope. A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the wire rope break. Place it on the wire rope midway between the winch and the anchor point. Do this before the wire rope is put under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the tension on the wire rope first.

1. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare wherethespectatorsshouldnotstand-neverbehind orinfrontofthevehicleandnevernearthewirerope orsnatchblock.Yoursituationmayhaveother"no people"zones.

Simple line drawing of a mechanical lever system with two hanging weights (no text or symbols)

0601115961US
NoPeopleZones

1. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is complete.

Line drawing of a person sitting in a car, viewed from the side window (no text or symbols)

UsingTheRemoteControl

NOTE:

- Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the winch motor to cool down.

- Whattolookforunderload:The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum, which will free up space for continued winching.

1. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes and shift the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire rope.
2. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the anchor.
3. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand, control the winch at all times.

Line drawing of a person disinfecting a car, no text or symbols present

RewindingTheWireRope

WARNING!

Topreventseriousinjury,NEVERputyourfingers insidethehookareaasyouarepowering-in.

NOTE:Howtospoolundernoload:Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control switch.

1. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook.

Front view of a car with a visible electrical plug inserted, showing grille and battery compartment (no text or symbols)

HookInStoredPosition

1. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.

NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected, clean, dry area.

Rigging Techniques

Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques. These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all times.

HowToChangeThePullingDirection

Top-down line drawing of a mechanical linkage system with two cars (no text or symbols)

0601115938US
ChangePullingDirections

All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto the spooling drum.

IncreasingPullingPower

In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling power.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

DoubleLine

Line drawing of a car being charged with a plug, no text or symbols present

WireRopeRouting

Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum, and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

POWER STEERING

Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models

The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP" message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.

Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the "SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF" message is displayed the instrument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Check fluid level when the engine is cold and off. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Donot overfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommendedpower steeringfluid.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpowersteeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredbythe NewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES ONLY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

1—ON/OFF 3—SET (-) 2—RES (+) 4—CANCEL

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheSpeedControlsystemonwhennotinuse isdangerous. Youcouldaccidentallysetthesystemor causeittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlose controlandhaveanaccident. Alwaysleavethesystem offwhenyouarenotusingit.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Vary The Speed Setting

ToIncreaseSpeed

When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a1mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

- Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

ToDecreaseSpeed

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1km / h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1km / h .
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.

WARNING!

SpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethesystem cannotmaintinaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecould gotoofastfortheconditions,andyoucouldlose controlandhaveanaccident.DonotuseSpeedControl inheavytrafficoronroadsthatarewinding,icy, snow-coveredorslippery.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from memory.

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to "ParkSense System Usage Precautions" in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound and Display" is selected.

NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn on indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the object's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

Top-down diagram of a car with sensor waves, labeled 'PRND' below (no other text or symbols)

Single1/2SecondTone

032771343

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

SlowToneFastTone

032771342

032771344

ContinuousTone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

032771345

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (inches/cm)	Greater than 79 inches (200 cm)	79-45 inches (200-115 cm)	45-31 inches (115-80 cm)	31-18 inches (80-45 cm)	Less than 18 inches (45 cm)
Audible Alert Chime	None Single	1/2 Second Tone	Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd			Solid	2nd Flashing	1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No Yes Yes	Yes Yes

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

AdjustableChimeVolumeSettings

The rear chime volume settings are programmable.

- The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled.

If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel" for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see your authorized dealer.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will show "PARKSENSE OFF". Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and besure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to yours surrounding. Failure todos can result in serious injury or death.
• BeforeusingParkSense,itisstronglyrecommended thattheballmountandhitchballassemblyis disconnectedfromthevehiclewhenthevehicleis notusedfortowing.Failureretodosocanresultin injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitchballwillbemuch closertotheobstacle thanthe rearfasciawhentheloudspeakersoundsthecontinuoustone.Also,thesensorscoulddetecttheball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size andshape,givingafalseindicationthatanobstacle isbehindthevehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSenseisonlyaparkingaidanditisunableto recognizeeveryobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornot detectedatall.Obstacleslocatedaboveorbelowthe sensorswillnotbedetectedwhentheyareinclose proximity.
  • The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in tim when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over his /hers shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to "ParkSense System Usage Precautions" in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound and Display" is selected.

NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

ParkSense Display

The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (inches/cm)	Greater than 79 inches (200 cm)	79-45 inches (200-115 cm)	45-31 inches (115-80 cm)	31-18 inches (80-45 cm)	Less than 18 inches (45 cm)
Front Distance (inches/cm)	Greater than 47 inches (120 cm)	47-39 inches (120-100 cm)	39-25 inches (100-65 cm)	25-12 inches (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime)	None Single	1/2 Second Tone (for rear only)	Slow (for rear only)	Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No Yes Yes	Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

FrontParkAssistAudibleAlerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

AdjustableChimeVolumeSettings

The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable.

- The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense

Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front ParkSense switch.

Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense switch.

When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds.

Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the "FRONT PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF" message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with "OFF" in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the corresponding arcs and "OFF" message.

The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Service The ParkSense Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will

continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see your authorized dealer.

If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will read "FRONT PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show the "FRONT PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF" message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with

"OFF" in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be appear in the instrument cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open

position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingParkSense.Alwayscheckcarefullybehind yourvehicle,lookbehindyou,andbesuretocheck forpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions, andblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youareresponsibleforsafetyandmustcontinuetopayattentionto your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in seriousinjuryordeath.
• BeforeusingParkSense,itisstronglyrecommended thattheballmountandhitchballassemblyis disconnectedfromthevehiclewhenthevehicleis notusedfortowing.Failureretodosocanresultin injuryordamagetovehiclesorobstaclesbecausethe hitchballwillbemuchclosertotheobstaclethanthe rearfasciawhentheloudspeakersoundsthecontinuoustone.Also,thesensorscoulddetecttheball mountandhitchballassembly,dependingonitssize andshape,givingafalseindicationthatanobstacle isbehindthevehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSenseisonlyaparkingaidanditisunableto recognizeeveryobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornot detectedatall.Obstacleslocatedaboveorbelowthe sensorswillnotbedetectedwhentheyareinclose proximity.
  •The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in tim when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over his /hers shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu. Whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or

Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X".

IfEquipped—CargoCameraIcons:

• Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
  • — Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button

to indicate the current active Camera image being displayed is made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed.

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed.

A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-VERSE gear.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

NOTE: For further information about how to access and change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

ZonesDistanceTo	TheRearOfTheVehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow	1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green	6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheParkViewRearBackUpCamera.Always checkcarefullybehindyourvehicle,andbesureto checkforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youareresponsibleforthesafetyofyoursurroundingsandmust continuetopayattentionwhilebackingup.Failureretodosocanresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

• Toavoidvehicledamage, ParkViewshouldonlybe usedasaparkingaid. The ParkViewcameraisunableto vieweveryobstacleorobjectinyourdrivepath.
• Toavoidvehicledamage,thevehiclemustbedriven slowlywhenusingParkViewtobeabletostopin timewhenanobstacleisseen.Itisrecommended thatthedriverlookfrequentlyoverhis/hershoulder whenusingParkView.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

TurningRearViewCameraImageOn:

1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button → to turn the Rear View Camera system on.

NOTE: Once initiated by the "Backup Camera" button, the Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the "X" button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the previous selected screen will appear.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE

The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

0601115952US

FuelFillerCap

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

WARNING!

• Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthe vehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthetankis beingfilled.
• Neveraddfueltothevehiclewhentheengineis running.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainersonthe groundwhilefilling.

CAUTION!

• Damagethefuelsystemoremissionscontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap.
• Apoorlyfittingfuelfillercapcouldletimpurities intothefuelsystem.
• Apoorlyfittingfuelfillercapmaycausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon.
• Toavoidfuelspillageandoverfilling,donot"top off"thefueltankafterfilling.Whenthefuelnozzle "clicks"orshutsoff,thefueltankisfull.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

Staticelectricitycancauseanignitionofflammable liquid, vapororgasinanyvehicleortrailer. Toreduce riskofseriousinjuryordeathwhenfillingcontainers:

• Alwaysplacecontaineronthegroundbeforefilling.
• Keepthepumpnozzleincontactwiththecontainer whenyouarefillingit.
• Useonlyapprovedcontainersforflammableliquid.
• Donotleavecontainerunattendedwhilefilling.
• Astaticelectricchargecouldcauseasparkandfire hazard.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display

area. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

VEHICLE LOADING

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

DonotloadyourvehicleanyheavierthantheGVWR orthemaximumfrontandrearGAWR.Ifyoudo,parts onyourvehiclecanbreak,oritcanchangetheway yourvehiclehandles.Thiscouldcauseyoutolose control.Alsooverloadingcanshortenthelifeofyour vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

WARNING!

Ifthegrosstrailerweightis5,000lbs(2,267kg)ormore, itisrecommendedtouseaweight-distributinghitchto ensurestablehandlingofyourvehicle.Ifyouusea standardweight-carryinghitch,youcouldlosecontrol ofyourvehicleandcauseacollision.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

TrailerFrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of

hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.

WARNING!

• Animproperlyadjustedweightdistributinghitch systemmayreducehandling,stabilityandbraking performanceandcouldresultinacollision.
• Weightdistributingsystemsmaynotbecompatible withsurgebrakecouplers.Consultwithyourhitch andtrailermanufacturerorareputableRecreational Vehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

Line drawing of a pickup truck and a moving vehicle (no text or symbols)

0601115981US

WithoutWeight-DistributingHitch(Incorrect)

Line drawing of a pickup truck and a moving vehicle (no text or symbols)

0601115980US

Line drawing of a pickup truck and its trailer (no text or symbols)

0601115956US

WithWeight-DistributingHitch(Correct)ImproperAdjustmentOfWeight-DistributingHitch

(Incorrect)

RecommendedDistributionHitchAdjustment

TowingWith1500AirSuspension

1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is required if already in normal ride height.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine run position with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system.

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).

2. Under the instrument cluster or touch screen radio settings, enable jack mode. Jack mode will be canceled and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph (8 kmh).

3. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

Side profile illustration of a pickup truck with wheels and a side-mounted tire, showing no text or symbols

0601115960US

MeasuringHeight(H)

1. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.

2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

3. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers' recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

4. Use the instrument cluster or touch screen radio settings and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck returns to normal ride height. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers' recommendations have been met.

5. The truck can now be driven.

MeasurementExample	Example1500Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/37
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged.

TowingWith2500/3500AirSuspension

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).

NOTE: Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly loaded.

1. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
2. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.
3. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

4. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers' recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

5. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers' recommendations have been met.

MeasurementExample	Example2500/3500 Height(mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1	1044

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged.

TowingWithAllOther1500/2500/3500(Non-AirSuspension)

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.

4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers' recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers' recommendations have been met.

MeasurementExample	Example2500/3500 Height(mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged.

Fifth-WheelHitch

The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.

Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option. Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating instructions.

GooseneckHitch

The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

TrailerHitchTypeandMaximumTrailerWeight
HitchTypeMax.TrailerWeight/Max.TongueWeight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model	5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 11	1,000 lbs (4,989 kg) / 1100 lbs (498 kg)
Class V - 2500/3500 Models	18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) / 1800 lbs (816 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500 Model	25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 5000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Model	20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) / 4000 lbs (1,814 kg)
Gooseneck Or Fifth Wheel - 3500 Model	32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) / 6000 lbs (2,721 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:

• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca(Canada)
-rambodybuilder.com

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

WeightDistribution

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
- The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire And Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.

CAUTION!

• Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine,axle orotherpartscouldbedamaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This help the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoacollision.Followthese guidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingassafeas possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poorperformanceordamage tobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.
• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainstothe hookretainersofthevehiclehitch.Crossthechains underthetrailertongueandallowenoughslackfor turningcorners.
• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade.Whenparking,applytheparkingbrakeonthe towvehicle.Putthetowvehicletransmissionin

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

PARK.Forfour-wheeldrivevehicles,makesurethe transfercaseisnotinNEUTRAL.Always,blockor "chock"thetrailerwheels.

• GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
- Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:

1.GVWR
2.GTW
3.GAWR
4. Tongueweightratingforthetrailerhitchutilized.

TowingRequirements—Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

TowingRequirements—TrailerBrakes

- Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle'shydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrakesystemandcauseittofail.Youmightnothavebrakes whenyouneedthemandcouldhaveacollision.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstoppingdistance. When towing you should allow for additional spacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfront ofyou.Failuretodosocouldresultinacollision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should beofadequatecapacity. Failuretodo this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

IntegratedTrailerBrakeModule—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.

1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever

The user interface consists of the following:

ManualBrakeControlLever

Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.

The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied.

TrailerBrakeStatusIndicatorLight

This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.

If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the "Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light" will not be displayed.

If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the "Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light" will flash.

GAINAdjustmentButtons(+/-)

Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).

GAIN

The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather.

AdjustingGAIN

NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.

2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions.

3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in, the trailer connected message should appear in the instrument cluster display (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the instrument cluster display options.

4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until "TRAILER TOW" appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter "TRAILER TOW".

6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.

7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.

8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.

Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

	LightElectricHeavyElectricLightEOH		HeavyEOH
Type of Trailer Brakes	Electric Trailer Brakes	Electric Trailer Brakes	Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes	Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
Load	*Under 10,000 lbs	*Above 10,000 lbs	*Under 10,000 lbs	*Above 10,000 lbs

* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the selection.

DisplayMessages

The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument cluster display. Display messages, along with a single chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

Connectingatrailerthatisnotcompatiblewiththe ITBMsystemmayresultinreducedorcompletelossof trailerbraking.Theremaybeincreaseinstopping distanceortrailerinstabilitywhichcouldresultin personalinjury.

CAUTION!

Connectingatrailerthatisnotcompatiblewiththe ITBMsystemmayresultinreducedorcompletelossof trailerbraking.Theremaybeaincreaseinstopping distanceortrailerinstabilitywhichcouldresultin damagetoyourvehicle,trailer,orotherproperty.

NOTE:

• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.

TowingRequirements—TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle's wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

NOTE:

• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle's electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B[" "]
    C["5"] --> D[" "]
    E["4"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    I["1"] --> J["2"]
    style I stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px
    style J stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px

0601085400US

Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

0601085401US

Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control).

NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid transmission overheating.

If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing." Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing (6-speed automatic only).

Tow/HaulMode

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.

SpeedControl—IfEquipped

• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

CityDriving

- In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

HighwayDriving

• Reduce speed.
  • Temporarily turn off air conditioning.

AirSuspensionSystem

To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle, the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system.

SNOWPLOW

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications.

WARNING!

Snowplowsandotheraftermarketequipments should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The

WARNING!(Continued)

airbagcrashsensorsmaybeaffectedbythechangein thefrontendstructure.Theairbagscoulddeploy unexpectedlyorcouldfailtodeployduringacollision resultinginseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snow plow applications can cause damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Attachingasnowplowtothisvehiclecouldadversely affectperformanceoftheairbagsysteminacollision. Donotexpectthattheairbagwillperformasdescribed earlierinthismanual.

2500/3500 Models Only

Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option. These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.

(Continued)

NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.

WARNING!

Attachingasnowplowtothisvehiclecouldadversely affectperformanceoftheairbagsysteminacollision. Donotexpectthattheairbagwillperformasdescribed earlierinthismanual.

CAUTION!

The "LampOut" indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.

BeforePlowing

• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level.

• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.

• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear. The cutting edge should be 14 to 12 in (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.

• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.

SnowplowPrepPackageModelAvailability

ForInformationaboutsnowplowapplicationsvisit www.ramtrucks.comorrefertothecurrentBodyBuilders Guide.

1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers, etc.

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver's side door opening.

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.

Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.

The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked.

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.

OverTheRoadOperationWithSnowplowAttached

The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance.

OperatingTips

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed. The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

GeneralMaintenance

Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer's instructions.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed.

• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15mph (24km / h) . At higher speeds operate in 4HI.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TowingConditionWheelsOFFTheGround		Two-WheelDriveModels	Four-WheelDriveModels
Flat Tow NONE	TOTAL-	LOWED	SeeInstructionsAutomatic transmission in PARKManual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front	TOTAL-	LOWED	NOTALLOWED
	Rear OK NOTALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK	OK

NOTE:

• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to "Air Suspension – If

"Equipped" for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

DONOTflattowthisvehicle.Damagethedrivetrain will result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!

• Towingwiththerearwheelsonthegroundwill causeseveretransmissiondamage.Damagefrom impropertowingisnotcoveredundertheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.
• Donotdisconnectthedriveshaftbecausefluidmay leakfromthetransmission,causingdamagetointernalparts.

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!

- DONOTdollytowany4WDvehicle.Towingwith onlyonesetofwheelsontheground(frontorrrear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

damage.TowwithallfourwheelseitherONthe ground,orOFFtheground(usingavehicletrailer).

• Towonlyintheforwarddirection.Towingthis vehiclebackwardscancauseseveredamagetothe transfercase.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL. Tobecertain the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting Into NEUTRAL". Internal transmission damage will result, if the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL during towing.
• AutomatictransmissionsmustbeplacedinPARK, andmanualtransmissionsmustbeplacedingear (notinNeutral)forrecreationaltowing.
• Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer cased damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Donotdisconnectthereardriveshaftbecausefluid willleakfromthetransfercase,causingdamageto internalparts.
• Donotuseabumper-mountedclamp-ontowbaron yourvehicle. The bumperfacebarwillbedamaged.

ShiftingIntoNEUTRAL(N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheNEUTRAL(N)positionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRAL(N)positiondisengagesboththefrontandreadriveshafts fromthepowertrain, andwillallowthevehicletoroll, eveniftheautomatictransmissionisinPARK(or manualtransmissionisingear). Theparkingbrake shouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriverisnotinthe vehicle.

CAUTION!

It isnecessary to follow these stepstobecertain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing top prevent damaget internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
   NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL:
6. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N)

7. With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models have a small, recessed "N" button (at the center of the transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. Release the parking brake.

9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
14. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode. Remove the key fob from the ignition.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
16. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle's ride height to compensate for temperature effects.

ShiftingOutOfNEUTRAL(N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

- With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

- With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.

- With electronic shift transfer case with push-button selector switch, push and hold the switch for the desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on.

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).

1. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
2. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual transmission).
3. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
4. Start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

DRIVING TIPS

Driving On Slippery Surfaces

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidaccelerationonslipperysurfacesidangerous. Unequaltractioncancausesuddenpullingoftherear wheels.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleand possiblyhaveacollision.Accelerateslowlyandcarefullywheneverthereislikelytobepoortraction(ice, snow,wet,mud,loosesand,etc.).

Driving Through Water

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/RisingWater

WARNING!

Donotdriveonoracrossaroadorpathwherewateris flowingand/orrising(asinstormrun-off).Flowing watercanwearawaytheroadorpath'ssurface and causeyourvehicletosinkintodeeperwater.Furthermore,flowingand/orrisingwatercancarryyourvehicleawaysswiftly.Failureretofollowthiswarningmay resultininjuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,your passengers,andothersaroundyou.

ShallowStandingWater

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

- Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle's tractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph(8km/h) whendrivingthroughstandingwater.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle's brakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstoppingdistances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstanding water,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthebrake pedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers, andothersaroundyou.

CAUTION!

• Alwayscheckthedepthofthestandingwaterbefore drivingthroughit.Neverdrivethroughstanding waterthatisdeeperthanthebottomofthetirerims mountedonthevehicle.
• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepaththat isunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesinthe waybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.
• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendrivingthrough standingwater. Thiswillminimizewaveeffects.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycausedamage toyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Alwaysinspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil,transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination(i.e.,fluid thatismilkyorfoamyinappearance)afterdriving throughstandingwater.Donotcontinuetooperate thevehicleifanyfluidappearscontaminated,asthis mayresultinfurtherdamage.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecancause ittolockupandstallout,andcauseseriousinternal damagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

Off-Road Driving Tips

Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously.

If you must back down a hill, back straight down using REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.

When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.

AfterDrivingOff-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasivematerialinanypartofthebrakesmaycause excessivewearorunpredictablebraking. You might nothavefullbrakingpowerwhenyouneeditto preventacollision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CONTENTS

■HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS....459
■ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . .459
■BULB REPLACEMENT....464

□Replacement Bulbs....464

□Replacing Exterior Bulbs....466

■FUSES....473
□Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
■JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING....479
□Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks . .479
□Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series Trucks....496
■JUMP STARTING....513
□Preparations For Jump Start....513

□Jump Starting Procedure....515

■IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS....516
■GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED TRANSMISSION....517

☐Column Gear Selector — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . .517
□Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped . . .518

■MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION....519
■FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .....520
■TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .....521

□Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
□Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
□Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
□Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped. . . . . . . .524

458 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

■ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)....525
■EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .....525

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED

0306114048US

AssistAndSOSMirror

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button.

WARNING!

ALWAYSobeytrafficlawsandpayattentiontothe road.ALWAYSdrivesafelywithyourhandsonthe steeringwheel.YouhavefullresponsibilityandassumeallrisksrelatedtotheuseoftheUconnectand

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

SiriusXMGuardianfeaturesandapplicationsinthis vehicle.OnlyuseUconnectfeaturesandSiriusXM Guardianserviceswhenitissafetodoso.Failureuretodo somayresultinanaccidentinvolvingseriousinjuryor death.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.

ASSISTCall

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

- Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you'll be connected to

someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.

SOSCall

1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

1. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.

2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:

3. Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
   • The vehicle brand.

4. The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

5. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

WARNING!

ALWAYSobeytrafficlawsandpayattentiontothe road.ALWAYSdrivesafelywithyourhandsonthe steeringwheel.YouhavefullresponsibilityandassumeallrisksrelatedtotheuseoftheUconnectandSiriusXMGuardianfeaturesandapplicationsinthis vehicle.OnlyuseUconnectfeaturesandSiriusXM Guardianserviceswhenitissafetodoso.Failureretodo somayresultinanaccidentinvolvingseriousinjuryor death.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

• Once a connection is made between the vehicle's SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.

• The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

- Ifanyoneinthevehiclecouldbeindanger(e.g.,fireor smokeisvisible,dangerousroadconditionsorlocation),donotwaitforvoicecontactfromanEmergency ServicesAgent.Allooccupantsshouldexitthevehicle immediatelyandmovetoasafelocation.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverplaceanythingonornearthevehicle'soperablenetworkandGPSantennas.Youcouldprevent operablenetworkandGPSsignalreception,which canpreventyourvehiclefromplacinganemergency call.AnoperablenetworkandGPSsignalreception isrequiredfortheSOSCallsystemtofunction properly.
• TheSOSCallsystemisembeddedintothevehicle's electricalsystem.Donotaddaftermarketelectrical equipmenttothevehicle'selectricalsystem.This maypreventyourvehiclefromsendingasignalto initiateanemergencycall.Toavoidinterferencethat cancausetheSOSCallsystemtofail,neveradd aftermarketequipment(e.g.,two-waymobileradio, CBradio, datarecorder,etc.)toyourvehicle'selectricalsystemormodifytheantennasonyourvehicle.IF YOURVEHICLELOSESBATTERYPOWERFOR ANYREASON(INCLUDINGDURINGOR AFTER ANACCIDENT),THEUCONNECTFEATURES, APPSANDSERVICES,AMONGOTHERS,WILL NOTOPERATE.

WARNING!(Continued)

• ModificationstoanypartoftheSOSCallsystem couldcausetheairbagsystemtofailwhenyouneed it.Youcouldbeinjurediftheairbagsystemisnot theretohelpprotectyou.

SOSCallSystemLimitations

Vehicles sold in Mexico DONOThave SOS Call system capabilities.

SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer."
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer."

WARNING!

• IgnoringtheRearviewMirrorlightcouldmeanyou willnothaveSOSCallservices.IftheRearview Mirrorlightisilluminated,haveanaauthorized dealerservicetheSOSCallsystemimmediately.
• TheOccupantRestraintControlmoduleturnsonthe airbagWarningLightontheinstrumentpanelifa malfunctioninanypartofthesystemisdetected.If theAirBagWarningLightisilluminated,havean authorizeddealerservicetheOccupantRestraint Controlsystemimmediately.

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.
  • The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
  • Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.

• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
  • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

WARNING!

ALWAYSobeytrafficlawsandpayattentiontothe road.ALWAYSdrivesafely with yourhandsonthe steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assumeallrisksrelatedtotheuseoftheUconnectand SiriusXMGuardianfeaturesandapplicationsinthis vehicle.OnlyuseUconnectfeaturesandSiriusXM Guardianserviceswhenitissafetodoso.Failureretodo somayresultinanaccidentinvolvingseriousinjuryor death.

464 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

Toavoiddamagethemirrorduringcleaning,never sprayanycleaningsolutiondirectlyontothemirror.Applythesolutionontoacleanclothandwipethe mirrorclean.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

Interior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Overhead Console Lamps T$ 212-9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Base Quad Headlamp - Low Beam	H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp - High Beam	9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad Headlamp)	3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam	9005SI+
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam	9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp)	LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape)	9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921

	BulbNumber
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp	LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194	NA
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp	3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp	LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440	/W21W
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp	194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels)	194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194

466 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

BaseQuad/PremiumBi-Halogen:LowBeam Headlamp, HighBeamHeadlamp, FrontParkAnd Turn—IfEquipped

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve or connector with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

HeadlampAssemblyAttachmentScrewLocations

1. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole.
2. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing.

1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket.
3. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.

CAUTION!

• Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingit withyourfingersorbyallowingittocontactother oilysurfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.
• Alwaysusethecorrectbulbsizeandtypeforreplacement.Anincorrectbulbsizeortypemayoverheat andcausedamagethelamp,thebulbsocket,orthe lampwiring.

NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced.

FogLamps—IfEquipped

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 14 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingitwith yourfingersorbyallowingittocontactotheroily surfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.

RearTail/Stop, TurnSignalAndBackupLamps

1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet metal.

TailLampScrewLocations

1. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel.

Diagram of a device with an arrow indicating left-side movement, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

0801116003US

PullingOutTheTailLamp

1. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to unlock it from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingitwith yourfingersorbyallowingittocontactotheroily surfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.

1. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)With CargoLamp

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the body as shown.

1. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.

1. Turn the desired bulb socket 14 turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing.

470 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

Line drawing of hands using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

CHMSLBulbAndSocket

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingitwith yourfingersorbyallowingittocontactotheroily surfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.

•Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

1. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.

CabTopClearanceLamps—IfEquipped

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

Line drawing of a hand holding a screwdriver, with a small inset showing a leaf (no text or symbols)

RemovingRearScrewFromClearanceLamp

1. Rotate the bulb socket 14 turn and pull it from the lamp assembly.

1. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.

472 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

RearLampBarIDMarker(DualRearWheels)—If Equipped

1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to the bulb sockets.

Diagram of a car back panel with two arrows pointing to the side of the panel (no text or symbols present)

ScrewLocations

1. Turn the socket 14 turn counterclockwise to access the bulb.

2. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.

3. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing.

SideMarkerLamps(DualRearWheels)—If Equipped

Line drawing of a car's rear wheel and side door, showing two black arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

SideMarkerLampLocations

1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket 14 turn counterclockwise and remove from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing.

FUSES

WARNING!

• Whenreplacingablownfuse,alwaysuseanappropriatereplacementfusewiththesameampratingas theoriginalfuse.Neverreplaceafusewithanother fuseofhigheramprating.Neverreplaceablown fusewithmetalwiresoranyothermaterial.Donot placeafuseinsideacircuitbreakercavityorvice versa.Failureretouseproperfusesmayresultin seriouspersonalinjury,fireand/orpropertydamage.
• Beforereplacingafuse, makesurethattheignitionis offandthatalltheotherservicesareswitchedoff and/ordisengaged.
• Ifthereplacedfuseblowsagain,contactanaauthorizeddealer.
• Ifageneralprotectionfuseforsafetysystems(air bagsystem,brakingsystem),powerunitsystems (enginesystem,transmissionsystem)orsteering systemblows,contactanauthorizeddealer.

Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Illustration of a mechanical device with a black arrow pointing to a component, no text or symbols present

PowerDistributionCenterLocation

CavityCartridgeFuseMicroFuseDescription
F01 80 Amp Black - Rad Fan Control Module - If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow - Rad Fan - If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green - Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green - Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green -	Starter	Solenoid
F08	20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/ Cummins Diesel)	-	Emissions Diesel - If Equipped
F09	40 Amp Green (Special Services Vehicle & Cummins Diesel)	-	Diesel Fuel Heater - If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green -	Body Controller /	Exterior Lighting #2
F10	50 Amp Red	-	Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 - If Equipped with Stop/Start
F11	30 Amp Pink	-	Integrated Trailer Brake Module - If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green -	Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green -	Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green -	Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
F16	30 Amp Pink	-	Smart Bar - If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD Diesel)30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)		- SCR - If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink - Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink - Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)		- Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink - Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink - Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink - Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink - Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue	- Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue	- Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink - Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink (1500 LD Diesel)	- Urea Heater Control - If Equipped
F32	-	-	Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue	-	Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink - Vehicle System Interface Module #2 - If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter – If Equipped
F42 –	20 Amp Yellow		Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red		Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red		Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red	Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles)
F50 –	20 Amp Yellow	Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red	Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instrument Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only)
F52 –	5 Amp Tan		Battery Sensor
F53	–	20 Amp Yellow	Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 –	20 Amp Yellow		Adjustable Pedals
F56 – 15 Amp Blue	Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
F57	–	20 Amp Yellow	Transmission
F58 –	20 Amp Yellow		Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red		SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 – 15	Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
F61 – 10	Amp Red (1500)	LD Diesel & Cummins Diesel)	PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10	Amp Red Air Conditioning	Clutch
F63 – 20	Amp Yellow Ignition Coils	(Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)
F64 – 25	Amp Clear Fuel Injectors /	Powertrain
F65 –	-		Spare Fuse
F66 – 10	Amp Red Sunroof /	Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 – 10	Amp Red CD /	DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module – IfEquipped
F69 – 15	Amp Blue Mod	SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F70 –	30 Amp Green		Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25	Amp Clear	Amplifier
F72 – 10	Amp Red	PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20	Amp Yellow Fuel	Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped
F74 –	20 Amp Yellow	(GasEngine & 1500 LDDiesel)	Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
F75 – 10	Amp Red	Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10	Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10	Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78 – 10	Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
F79 – 15	Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10	Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 – 20	Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
F82 – 10	Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F84 – 15	Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10	Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10	Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10	Amp Red Air Suspension - If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module
F88 – 15	Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91	-	20 Amp Yellow	Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
F93 – 20	Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10	Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10	Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 – 10	Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
F98 – 25	Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10	Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10	Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15	Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams – IfEquipped
F104	–	20 Amp Yellow	Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console)

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positionedandfullylatched.Failuretodosomayallow water to get into the power distribution center and possiblyresultinanelectricalsystemfailure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The useofafusewitharatingotherthanindicatedmay resultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.Ifa properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a probleminthecircuitthatmustbecorrected.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

underaraisedvehicle, takeittoaservicecenter whereitcanberaisedonalift.

• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleison ajack.
• Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolforchanging tiresonly. Thejackshouldnotbeusedtoliftthe vehicleforservicepurposes. Thevehicleshouldbe jackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceor slipperyareas.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system, there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be activated through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be activated through the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

JackLocation

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.

RemovalOfJackAndTools(1500Series)

To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the front passenger's seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and keyboard (no text or symbols)

JackAccessCover

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly out from under the seat.

Technical diagram of a car intake manifold showing valve and connector components (no text or symbols)

JackAndTools(1500Series)

Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools from bag.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with multiple rods and tubing (no text or symbols)

0705120142US
JackAndToolBag

482 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

There are two ways to assemble the tools:

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3

2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4

CAUTION!

• Thelugwrenchcanonlybeattachedtoextension2.
- Whenattachingthetooltothewinchmechanismbe surethelargeflaredendopeningonextension4is

CAUTION!(Continued)

positionedcorrectlyoverthewinchmechanismad-justingnut.

- Damagethelugwrench, extensionsandwinch mechanismmayoccurfromimpropertoolassembly.

AssembledForJackOperation

0705120140US

AssembledForJackOperation

1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Extension With Jack Hook
3 — Extension 3

(Continued)

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthemin theoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledrivingyou mayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationor sharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketorotherobjects inthevehiclemaymovearoundwithforce,resulting inseriousinjury.

RemovingTheSpareTire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle's front panel showing a tool and bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

InsertingTheExtensionTubesIntoTheAccessHole

484 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Illustration of a person using a tool to adjust or install a vehicle component (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheLugWrenchHandle

1. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle tire assembly with mounting bracket and wheel (no text or symbols)

PullingTheSpareTireOut

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 485

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Illustration of hands pulling a tire with a tool, no text or symbols present

GainingAccessToTheRetainer

1. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to clean or repair a car tire (no text or symbols visible)

PullingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfTheWheel

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

486 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

PreparationsForJacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoffthe roadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejackor changingthewheel.

1. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackingInstructions(1500Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow the setire changing warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheeltoberaised.
• ApplytheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetthetransmissioninPARK.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
  • Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,aresecurely stowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththevalvestem facingtheground.

060600714

JackWarningLabel

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

488 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Placement of the jack is critical:

NOTE: Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the vehicle.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and rear views with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Jack/Extensions Placement1500

4x2SeriesTrucksFrontJackingLocation

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm.

Mechanical component diagram showing a valve assembly with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

4X2FrontJackingLocationIndicator

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car suspension system with a lever and bracket (no text or labels)

4X2FrontJackingLocation

4x4SeriesTrucksFrontJackingLocation

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle suspension system with no visible text or symbols

4X4FrontJackingLocationIndicator

490 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever and suspension mechanism (no text or labels)

0705120144US

4X4FrontJackingLocationRearJackingLocation

RearJackingLocation

Operate the jack using the extension with jack hook and the lug wrench. The extension tubes may be used but is not required.

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the extension with jack hook to the jack and connect the extension tubes. Place

the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the extension with jack hook extending to the rear.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever and suspension mechanism (no text or labels)

0705120145US

Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, makes sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

1. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmakethe vehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackandhurt someonenearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenoughto removethetire.

1. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
2. Lower vehicle to ground, finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to "Torque Specifications" in "Technical Specifications". If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstop,couldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle. Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetireinthe placesprovided.

1. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
2. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
3. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

ToStowTheFlatOrSpare

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle. Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetireinthe placesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tirerepaired orreplacedimmediately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

Illustration of hands cleaning a tire with a tool, no text or symbols present

PushingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfTheWheel AndPositioningIt

1. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 493

Technical line drawing of a car tire assembly with mounting bracket and wheel (no text or symbols)

LugWrenchAndExtensionTubesAssembledAndIn Position

1. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place.

Illustration of a person using a tool to adjust or install a vehicle component (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheLugWrenchHandle

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

494 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

ReinstallingTheJackAndTools(1500Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with multiple rods and connectors (no text or symbols)

JackAndToolBag

1. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with clamps and a bolt, no text or symbols present

JackAndToolsTied

1. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 495

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

Diagram of a car interior showing engine compartment and valve assembly (no text or symbols)

JackHoldDownFastenerJackAndTools(1500Series)

NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down location.

1. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthemin theoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledrivingyou mayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationor sharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketorotherobjects inthevehiclemaymovearoundwithforce,resulting inseriousinjury.

Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series Trucks

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If youneedtoget underaraisedvehicle, takeittoaservicecenter whereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleison ajack.
• Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolforchanging tiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedtoliftthe vehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicleshouldbe jackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly.Avoidiceor slipperyareas.

JackLocation

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.

RemovalOfJackAndTools(2500And3500Series)

To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the front passenger's seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and exhaust pipe (no text or symbols)

JackAccessCover

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 497

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly out from under the seat.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from bracket assembly.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

0705115872US

WingBolt/JackAndTools(2500/3500Series)JackAndToolsBracketAssembly

498 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

There are two ways to assemble the tools:

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4

CAUTION!

• Thelugwrenchcanonlybeattachedtoextension2.
• Whenattachingthetooltothewinchmechanismbe surethelargeflaredendopeningonextension4is

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

positionedcorrectlyoverthewinchmechanismad-justingnut.

- Damagethelugwrench, extensionsandwinch mechanismmayoccurfromimpropertoolassembly.

AssembledForJackOperation

AssembledForJackOperation

1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Jack Driver
3 — Extension 3

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthemin theoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledrivingyou mayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationor sharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketorotherobjects inthevehiclemaymovearoundwithforce,resulting inseriousinjury.

RemovingTheSpareTire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle's front panel showing a tool and bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

InsertingTheExtensionTubesIntoTheAccessHole

500 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Illustration of a person using a tool to adjust or install a vehicle component (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheLugWrenchHandle

1. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle tire assembly with mounting bracket and suspension rod (no text or symbols)

PullingTheSpareTireOut

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

1. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
   NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

502 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

PreparationsForJacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoffthe roadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejackor changingthewheel.

1. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackingInstructions(2500And3500Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow the setire changing warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheeltoberaised.
• ApplytheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetthetransmissioninPARK.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
  • Toassurethatsparetires, flatorinflated, aresecurely stowed, sparesmustbestowed with thevalvestem facing the ground.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

0705115880US

LugWrenchAdaptorShownInJackAndToolsAssembly

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

JackWarningLabel

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

504 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground. Refer to "Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped" in this section.

Diagram of a car wheel with concentric rings and a black arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

LugWrenchAdapter

Technical line drawing of a car wheel assembly with a wrench, showing concentric circular components and no text or symbols.

LugWrenchAdapterAndWrench

3. Placement of the jack is critical: FrontJackingLocation

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and rear views with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Jack/ExtensionsPlacement2500/3500

When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.

Front view of a pickup truck showing grille and two upward arrows indicating side-mounted sensors or sensors (no text or symbols present)

0705115875US
FrontJackingLocation

506 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

RearJackingLocation

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the extension tubes extending to the rear.

Top-down technical diagram of a vehicle's rear suspension system, showing labeled components and two upward arrows indicating motion or assembly (no text or symbols beyond labels)

RearJackingLocation

Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, makes sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.

1. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmakethe vehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackandhurt someonenearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenoughto removethetire.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 507

1. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

Technical line drawing of a car tire assembly with a hand adjusting the wheel (no text or symbols)

RearInnerWheelProperPlacement(DualRearWheel Equipped)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

DualRearWheelJackPlacement

1. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the lug wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to "Torque Specifications" in "Technical Specifications". If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstop,couldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle. Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetireinthe placesprovided.

1. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
2. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.

NOTE: The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.

1. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.

ToStowTheFlatOrSpare

NOTE: Havetheflattirerepairedorreplacedimmediately.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle. Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetireinthe placesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tirerepaired orreplacedimmediately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 509

Diagram of a car tire wheel with a hand holding a tool, showing mechanical components and tire structure (no text or symbols)

Illustration of hands cleaning a tire with a tool, no text or symbols present

0705115865US

ReinstallingTheRetainerPushingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfTheWheel

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

AndPositioningIt

510 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extensions through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Technical line drawing of a car tire assembly with mounting bracket and wheel (no text or symbols)

LugWrenchAndExtensionTubesAssembledAndIn Position

1. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place.

Illustration of a person using a tool to adjust or install a vehicle component (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheLugWrenchHandle

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

ReinstallingTheJackAndTools(2500And3500 Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack-turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket assembly.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

0705115872US
JackAndToolsBracketAssembly

1. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing structural components and a black arrow indicating a specific area (no text or symbols present)

JackHoldDownFastener

NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly slides into the front hold down location.

512 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a black arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

WingBolt/JackAndTools(2500/3500Series)

HubCaps/WheelCovers—IfEquipped

The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.

CAUTION!

Useextremec cautionwhenremovingthefrontandrear centercaps.Damagecanoccurtothecentercapand/or

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

thewheelifscrewdrivertypetoolsareused. Apulling motion, notapryoffmotion, is recommended to removethecaps.

For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub cap off with a back and forth motion.

On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.

CAUTION!

- Useapullingmotiontoremovethehubcap.Donot useatwistingmotionwhenremovingthehubcap, damagetothehubcap;finishmayoccur.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Therearhubcapsonthedualrearwheelhastwo pulloffnotches.Makesurethatthehookofthejack handledriverislocatedsquarelyinthecapnotch beforeattemptingtopulloff.

You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.

Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjumpstartingifthebatteryisfrozen.It couldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackoranyother boostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreaterthan12 Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor,alternator orelectricalsystemmayoccur.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

Preparations For Jump Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.

514 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwhenever thehoodisraised.Itcanstartanytimetheignition switchisON.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfan blades.
- Removeanymetaljewelrysuchasrings, watch bandsandbraceletsthatcouldmakeaninadvertent electricalcontact. Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthiscould establishagroundconnectionandpersonalinjury couldresult.

(Continued)

Jump Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failuretofollowthisjumpstartingprocedurecould resultinpersonalinjuryorpropertydamagedueto batteryexplosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

ConnectingTheJumperCables

1. Connect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the discharged vehicle.

NOTE: Donotjumpoffuses. Only jump directly off positive post.

1. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.

2. Connect the negative (-)end of the jumper cable to the negative (-)post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthejumpercabletothenegative(-)post ofthedischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark couldcausethebatterytoexplodeandcouldresultin personalinjury. Onlyusethespecificgroundpoint,do notuseanyotherexposedmetalparts.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Donotconnectjumpercabletoanyofthefusesonthe positivebatteryterminal. Theresultingelectricalcurrentwillblowthefuse.

516 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

DisconnectingTheJumperCables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable from the negative (-)post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriespluggedintothevehiclepoweroutlets drawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennot

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

inuse(i.e.,cellulardevices,etc.).Eventually,ifplugged inlongenoughwithoutengineoperation,thevehicle's batterywilldischargesufficientlytodegradebattery lifeand/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.Ifyou seeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood,donot openthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtimetocool. Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressurecapwhen theradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamageyour vehicle.IfthetemperaturegaugereadsHOT(H),pull overandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehiclewiththeair conditionerturnedoffuntilthepointerdropsback intothenormalrange.IfthepointerremainsonHOT (H),andyouhearcontinuouschimes,turntheengine offimmediatelyandcallforservice.

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the following procedures to temporarily move the gear selector.

Column Gear Selector — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and push and hold the override release lever up.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and seat components with an arrow indicating a specific location (no text or symbols present)

GearSelectorOverrideAccessPort

518 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the gear selector override access cover (located to the right of the gear selector).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever down.

GearSelectorOverrideAccessCover

1. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
3. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

Alwayssecureyourvehiclebyfullyapplyingthe parkingbrakebeforeactivatingtheManualParkRelease.Inaddition,youshouldbeseatedinthedriver's seatwithyourfootfirmlyonthebrakepedalwhen activatingtheManualParkRelease.Activatingthe ManualParkReleasewillallowyourvehicletoroll awayifitisnotsecuredbytheparkingbrake,orby properconnectiontoatowvehicle.Activatingthe ManualParkReleaseonanunsecuredvehiclecould leadtoseriousinjuryordeathforthoseinoraround thevehicle.

In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 519

ManualParkReleasePullStrap

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above the parking brake release handle, below and to the left of the steering column.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of the lever) to the right.

5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the driver's seat. Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released position.

6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

ToResetTheManualParkRelease:

1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Safety" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated byexcessivewheelspeedsmaycausedamage,oreven failure,oftheaxleandtires.Atirecouldexplodeand injuresomeone.Donotspinyourvehicle'swheels fasterthan30mph(48km/h)orforlongerthan30 secondscontinuouslywithoutstoppingwhenyouare stuckanddonotletanyonenearaspinningwheel,no matterwhatthespeed.

CAUTION!

• Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmaylead totransmissionoverheatingandfailure.Allowthe enginetoidlewiththetransmissioninNEUTRAL foratleastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motioncycles.Thiswillminimizeoverheatingand reducetheriskofclutchortransmissionfailure duringprolongedeffortstofreeastuckvehicle.
• When "rocking" astuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, donotspin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damagemay result.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure.It canalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthewheels above30mph(48km/h)whileingear(nottransmissionshiftingoccurring).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to "Air Suspension" in "Starting And Operating" for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Towing Condition	Wheels OFFThe Ground	2WDModels4WDModels
Flat Tow NONE Iftransmissionisoperable:			Seeinstructionsin“RecreationalTowing”under“StartingAndOperating”•Automatic Transmission in PARK•Manual Transmission in gear (NOT NEUTRAL)•Transfer Case in NEUTRAL(N)•Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow	Front NOTALLOWED
	Rear OK NOTALLOWED
Flatbed ALLBESTMETHODDBESTMETHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.

If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" or "Gear Selector Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseslingtypeequipmentwhentowing. Vehicledamagemayoccur.
• Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck, donot attachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimpropertowing.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section for instructions on shifting the 8-speed transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is OFF.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed transmission.

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirement, can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

524 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information and detailed instructions.

CAUTION!

• Frontorrearwheelliftsmustnotbeused(ifthe remainingwheelsareontheground).Internaldamagetothetransmissionortransfercasewilloccurif afrontorrearwheelliftisusedwhentowing.
• Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer casedamage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotuseachainforfreeingastuckvehicle.Chains maybreak,causingseriousinjuryordeath.
• Standclearofvehicleswhenpullingwithtowhooks. Towstrapsmaybecomedisengaged,causingserious injury.

CAUTION!

Towhooksareforemergencyuseonly,torescuea vehiclestrandedoffroad.Donotusetowhooksfor towtruckhookuporhighwaytowing.Youcould damageyourvehicle.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

Please refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

■SCHEDULED SERVICING....529
□Maintenance Plan....530
□Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
■ENGINE COMPARTMENT....534
□3.6L Engine....534
□5.7L Engine....535
□6.4L Engine....536
□ Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine .....537
□Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
□Maintenance-Free Battery....538
■DEALER SERVICE....538
□Engine Oil — Gas Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
□Engine Oil Filter....541
□Engine Air Cleaner Filter ..... 542

□Air Conditioner Maintenance .....544
□Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)....550
□Accessory Drive Belt Inspection....551
□Body Lubrication....552
□Windshield Wiper Blades .....553
□Exhaust System....556
□ Cooling System .558
□Brake System....563
□Automatic Transmission....565
□Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level....568
□Transfer Case....569

■HOISTING .569

■TIRES....569

528 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

□Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

□Tires — General Information .....579

□Tire Types....585

□Spare Tires — If Equipped .....586

□Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

□Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .....590

□Tire Rotation Recommendations....591

■DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES....594

□Treadwear....594

□Traction Grades....594

□Temperature Grades....595

■STORING THE VEHICLE....595

■BODYWORK....595

□Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....595

□Body And Underbody Maintenance....596

□Preserving The Bodywork....596

■INTERIORS....599

□Seats And Fabric Parts ....599

□Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

□Leather Parts....601

□Glass Surfaces....601

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.

If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.

1500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

2500-3500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

SevereDutyAllModels

NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine RPM's. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

OnceAMonthOrBeforeALongTrip:

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level

530 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only) and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Maintenance Plan

RequiredMaintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for required maintenance.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

• Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear,evenifitoccursbeforetheoilindicator systemturnson.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

•Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.

•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.

•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

•Inspect exhaust system.

•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

•Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Mileage or time passed (which-ever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	1 12	1 3 14	1 5
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Additional Inspections
InspecttheCV/Universaljoints.XXXXX
Inspectfrontsuspension,tierodends,andreplaceifnecessary.	X		X		X			X		X		X		X
1500Models:Inspectthefrontandrearaxlesurfaces.lfgearoilleakageissus-pected,checkthefluidlevel.lfus-ingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet,off-roadorfrequenttrailertowing,changeaxlefluid.		X			X			X			X			X
2500/3500Models:Inspectthefrontandrearaxlesurfaces.lfgearoilleakageissus-pected,checkthefluidlevel.lfus-ingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet,off-roadorfrequenttrailertowing,changeaxlefluid.	X		X		X			X		X		X		X
Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceasnecessary.	X		X		X			X		X		X		X
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	1 1 12	1 3 14	1 5
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Adjustparkingbrakeasnecessary.XXXXXXX
Inspecttransfercasefluid.		X						X						X
Additional Maintenance
Replacecabinairfilter.	XXXX	XXX
Replace engine air filter.		X			X			X			X			X
Replacesparkplugs.**									X
Flushandreplacetheenginecool-antat10yearsor150,000miles(240,000km)whichevercomesfirst.									X					X
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilter(s)(six-speedauto-matically),ifusingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailertowing.					X						X
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilter(s)(six-speedauto-matically).											X
Inspectthetransfercasefluid, changeforanyofthefollowing: police,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailer towing.					X						X
Changethetransfercasefluid.X
InspectandreplacePCVvalveif necessary.									X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

- You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

WARNING! (Continued)

servicejob, takeyourvehicletocompetentmechanic.

- Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

534 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off

road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM's. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.6L Engine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery

6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

5.7L Engine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery

536 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

6.4L Engine

1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 7 — Battery
2 — Transmission Dipstick 8 — Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Solvent
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingwillcauseoilaerationor lossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamageyourengine.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluidto contactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotleanover abatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacidsplashesin eyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywith largeamountsofwater.Referto"JumpStarting Procedure"in"InCaseOfEmergency"forfurther information.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keepflame orsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuseabooster batteryoranyotherboostersourcewithanoutput greaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcableclampsto toucheachother.
• Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessoriescontainleadandleadcompounds.Washhandsafter handling.

CAUTION!

• Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedtothe negativepost.Batterypostsaremarkedpositive(+) andnegative(-)andareidentifiedonthebattery case.Cableclampsshouldbetightontheterminal postsandfreeofcorrosion.
• Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Donotusea "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

DEALER SERVICE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only doservicework for which you have the knowledge and the properequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Engine Oil — Gas Engine

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for further information.

1500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

2500-3500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

EngineOilSelection—3.6L/5.7L

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

EngineOilSelection—6.4L

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.

540 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity—3.6LEngines(1500Models Only)

Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is

recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)—5.7LEngine (1500/2500/3500Models)

Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)—6.4LEngine

Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

MaterialsAddedToEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

542 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the "Severe Duty Conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to dosocan result in serious personal injury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

EngineAirCleanerFilterInspection and Replacement

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter.

EngineAirCleanerFilterRemoval

1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.

3.6L/5.7LAirCleanerFilterCover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 543

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips

1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter

1. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

544 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.

1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

EngineAirCleanerFilterInstallation

NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.

3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

- Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricantsapprovedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioning system.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsareflammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Otherunapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancausethesystemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto Warranty Information Book, for further warranty information.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- The air conditioningsystem contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobed disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredbythe NewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a—If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling—R-1234yf

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

CabinFilterReplacement(A/CAirFilter)

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Donotremovethecabinairfilterwhilethevehicleis running,orwhiletheignitionisintheACCorON/RUNmode.Withthecabinairfilterremovedandthe bloweroperating,theblowercancontacthandsand maypropeldirtanddebrisintoyoureyes,resultingin personalinjury.

546 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door and release into dash panel.

RightSideOfGloveCompartment

1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door

1. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door, push inward on both sides of the glove compartment to release the glove compartment travel stops.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 547

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door

1. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop and pulling it toward you.

2. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine compartment showing internal components and a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

FilterCover

FingerTabsFingerTab

1. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

1. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.

CAUTION!

Thecabinairfilterisidentifiedwithanarrowto indicate airflowdirectionthroughthefilter.Failureto properlyinstallthefilterwillresultintheneedto replaceitmoreoften.

1. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.

1. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the glove compartment sides.

550 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

RightSideOfGloveCompartment

1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop

NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.

1. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door.

Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)

Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

0801115996US
FrontDriveShaftDoubleCardanJoint

The grease fitting is located at the rear of the front driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double cardan joint. Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals. Use Mopar Type MS-6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.

1 — Double Cardan Joint
2 — Grease Fitting
3 — Exploded View – Grease Fitting

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!

• Donotattempttoinspectanaccessorydrivebelt withvehiclerunning.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by themoving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only doservicework for which you have the knowledge and the properequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

552 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Technical line drawing of mechanical components with no visible text or symbols

AccessoryBelt(SerpentineBelt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• "Groove jumping"(belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)

- Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

WiperBladeRemoval/Installation

CAUTION!

Donotallowthewiperarmtospringbackagainstthe glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may bedamaged.

554 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

1—Wiper

2 — Locking Tab

3 — WiperArm

1. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the locking tab.

1—Wiper

2 — Locking Tab

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 555

1. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper arm.

WiperDisengaging

1 — Locking Tab

2 — Wiper

3 — Release Tab

1. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

2. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).

RemovingWiperFromWiperArm

1 — Wiper

2 — Locking Tab

3 — Wiper Arm J Hook

1. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

556 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

InstallingTheFrontWipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips" in "Safety" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyouparkover materialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmightbe grassorleavescomingintocontactwithyourehaust system.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareas whereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthat canburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition.In theeventofenginemalfunction,particularlyinvolvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossofperformance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly.Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetothecverterand vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Neveropenacoolingsystempressurecap whentheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.
• Keephands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead to turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

EngineCoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and

refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.

NOTE:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ ( -37^ ) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Donotopenhotenginecoolingsystem.Neveradd enginecoolant(antifreeze)whentheengineisoverheated.Donotloosenorremovethecaptocoolan overheatedengine.Heatcausespressureobuildup inthecoolingsystem.Topreventscaldingorinjury, donotremovethepressurecapwhilethesystemis hotorunderpressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheonespecifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorengine damagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CheckingCoolantLevel—3.6Land5.7LEngines

With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on the dipstick.

To check the coolant level:

1. Open the coolant reservoir.

1. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir neck.

562 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

CheckingCoolantLevel—6.4LEngine

The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" range on the bottle when the engine is cold.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-freeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

- Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureandpossiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingorridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormallyhighbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,andpossiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfullbrakingcapacityinanemergency.

FluidLevelCheck—BrakeMasterCylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.

The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a "MAX" mark and a "MIN" mark. The fluid level must be kept within these two marks. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted.

Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brakefluid. Referto "FluidsAndLubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information. Using the wrong type of brakefluid can severely damage your

WARNING!(Continued)

brakesystemand/orimpairitsperformance. The propertyofbrakefluidforyourvehicleisalso identifiedontheoriginalfactoryinstalledhydraulic mastercylinderreservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been inatightly closed container. Keep them master cylinder reservoir or secure data all times. Brake fluid in
  a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in alower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
  • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing the brakefluidtocatchfire. Brakefluidcanalsodamage painted and vinylsurfaces, careshouldbetakento avoid its contact with thesesurfaces.
• Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminate thebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscouldbe damaged,causingpartialorcompletebrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

Automatic Transmission

SelectionOfLubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications". It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufacturer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeteriorationin transmissionshiftqualityand/or torqueconverter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Referto "FluidsAndLubricants" in "TechnicalSpecifications" for fluids specifications.

SpecialAdditives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck—Eight-SpeedTransmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visitanauthorized dealerimmediately.Severetransmissiondamagemay occur.Anauthorizeddealerhasthepropertoolsto adjustthefluidlevelaccurately.

FluidLevelCheck—Six-SpeedTransmission

It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C). This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read the transmission sump temperature in the instrument cluster screen (refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" for further information).

Use the following procedure to check the transmission fluid level properly:

1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature. If the transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in PARK.

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated.

7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level should be between the "HOT" (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Donotoverfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid (see "Fluids And Lubricants" for fluid specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before re-checking the fluid level.

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two "COLD" (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50^ F ( 10^ C) it may not register on the dipstick. Donot add fluid until the temperature is elevated on oughto produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.

1. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube.

FluidAndFilterChanges—Eight-Speed Transmission

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

568 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

FluidAndFilterChanges—SixSpeedTransmission

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level position.

For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle.

For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.

LubricantSelection

Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specification" for further information.

NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Limited-SlipDifferentials

1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specification" for further information. The Mopar Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.

2500/3500 Model axles DONOTREQUIREany limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill.

DrainAndRefill

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals.

Transfer Case

SelectionOfLubricant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.

FluidLevelCheck

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.

DrainAndRefill

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

HOISTING

A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody.

CAUTION!

Neveruseafloorjackdirectlyunderthedifferential housingofaloadedtruckordamagetoyourvehicle mayresult.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

TireMarkings

TireMarkings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load

Standards Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

- P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

- European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

- LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

- Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

- High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

ExampleSizeDesignation:P215/65R15XL95H,215/65R1596H,LT235/85R16C,T145/80D18103M,31x10.5R15LT

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, orLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, orT o r S = Temporary spare tire or31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215,235,145= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65,85,80= Aspect ratio in percent (%)– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code– "R"means radial construction, or– "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15,16,18= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

EXAMPLE:

H= Speed Symbol

• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL= Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL= Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad- Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

TireIdentificationNumber(TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for

the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT= Department of Transportation- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 03 means the 3rd week

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 01 means the year 2001- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

574 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TireTerminologyAndDefinitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 575

TireLoadingAndTirePressure

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(Door)

Technical line drawing of a vehicle door panel with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(B-Pillar)

576 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

811b5a9a

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit—

(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

MetricExampleForLoadLimit

For example, if "XXX" amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

B11add11

WARNING!

Overloadingofyourtiresisdangerous. Overloading cancausetirefailure, affectvehiclehandling, and increaseyourstoppingdistance. Usetiresoftherecommendedloadcapacityforyourvehicle. Neveroverloadthem.

Tires — General Information

TirePressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
•Tread Wear
- Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Underinflationincreasestireflexingandcanresult inoverheatingandtirefailure.
  • Overinflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock. Objectsontheroadandchuckholescancause damagethatresultintirefailure.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Overinflatedorunderinflatedtirescanaffectvehicle handlingandcanfailsuddenly,resultinginlossof vehiclecontrol.
- Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could close to control your vehicle.
- Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicle totheothercancausethevehicletodrifttotheright orleft.
- Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

FuelEconomy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

TreadWear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

TireInflationPressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

- Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.

- Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,always reinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillpreventmoisture anddirtfromenteringthevalvestem,whichcould damagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation

pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

TirePressuresForHighSpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaximum loadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyourtirescould causethemtofail.Youcouldhaveaseriouscollision. Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothemaximumcapacity atcontinuousspeedsabove75mph(120km/h).

RadialPlyTires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftireson yourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandlepoorly. Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuse radialplytiresinsetsoffour.Nevercombinethem withothertypesoftires.

TireRepair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 14 of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

582 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

RunFlatTires—IfEquipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

TireSpinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may cause it to damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Do not spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) form more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donotlet any on e a r aspinning wheel, nomatter what the speed.

TreadWearIndicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1—WornTire
2—NewTire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.

LifeOfTire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresultingin seriousinjuryordeath.

584 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

ReplacementTires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the "Tire Safety Information" section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

- Donotuseatire, wheelsize, loadrating, orspeed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changest steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheels sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

- Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexorcapacity, otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequippedonyour vehicle. Usingatirewithasmallerloadindexcould resultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlose controlandhaveacollision.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshavingadequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

Tire Types

AllSeasonTires—IfEquipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

SummerOrThreeSeasonTires—IfEquipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40^ F ( 5^ C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotuseSummertiresinsnow/iceconditions.You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving to fast for conditions also create the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

SnowTires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compactor limited usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

SpareTireMatchingOriginalEquippedTireAndWheel—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

CompactSpareTire—IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compactandcollapsiblesparesarefortemporary emergencyuseonly.Withthesespares,donotdrive

WARNING!(Continued)

morethan50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespares havelimitedtreadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothe treadwearindicators,thetemporaryusesparetire needstobereplaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result insparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CollapsibleSpareTire—IfEquipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.

WARNING!

CompactandCollapsiblesparesarefortemporary emergencyuseonly.Withthesespares,donotdrive morethan50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespares havelimitedtreadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothe treadwearindicators,thetemporaryusesparetire needstobereplaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings, whichapplytoyourspare.Failurertodosocouldresult insparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

FullSizeSpare—IfEquipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

LimitedUseSpare—IfEquipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limitedusesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimitedusesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimitedusesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressureslistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocatedon thedriver'ssideB-Pillarortherearedgeofthedriver's sidedoor.Replace(orrepair)theoriginalequipment tireatthefirstopportunityandreinstallitonyour vehicle.Failureretodosocouldresultinlossofvehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoidproductsorautomaticcarwashesthatuseacidic solutionsorstrongalkalineadditivesorharshbrushes. Manyaftermarketwheelcleanersandautomaticcar washesmaydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.Onlycarwashsoap,MoparWheelCleaneror equivalentisrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, metalpolishesorovencleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

DarkVaporChrome, BlackSatinChrome, or LowGloss ClearCoatWheels

CAUTION!

Ifyourvehicleisequippedwiththesespecialty wheels,DONOTUSEwheelcleaners,abrasives,or polishingcompounds.Theywillpermanentlydamage thisfinishandsuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.HANDWASHONLYUS-INGMILDSOAPANDWATERWITHASOFT CLOTH.Usedonaregularbasis;thisisallthatis requiredtomaintainthisfinish.

Tire Chains (Traction Devices)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

- Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain type, and axle recommendations:

VehicleAxleRecommendationsTireSizesChainClass
1500 Models	Rear Only	P265/70R17	S Class
2500 Models	Rear Only	LT245/70R17ELT275/70R18E	U Class
2500 Power Wagon Models	Rear Only	LT285/70R17D	U Class
3500 (Single Rear Wheel)Models	Rear Only	LT275/70R18E	U Class
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)Models	Front/Rear	LT235/80R17E	U Class

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damagetoyourvehicleortires, observethe following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and others suspension components, it is important that only traction devices being good condition are used. Brokendevices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged part of the device before further use.
• Installdeviceastightlyaspossibleandthenre-tightenafterdrivingabout 12 mile(0.8km).
• Donotexceed30mph(48km/h).
• Drivecautiously and avoid severe returns and large bumps, especially with loaded vehicle.
• Donotdriveforaprolongedperiodondrypavement.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Observethetractiondevicemanufacturer'sinstruc-tionsonthemethodofinstallation,operatingspeed, andconditionsforuse.Alwaysusethesuggested operatingspeedofthedevicemanufacturer'sifitis lessthan30mph(48km/h).
• Donotusetractiondevicesonacompactsparetire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

592 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The suggested rotation method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle"] --> B[" collision"]
    C["Vehicle"] --> B
    D["Vehicle"] --> B
    B --> E[" collision"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

TireRotation

DirectionalTires—IfEquipped

For the R/T package with 22" tires and wheels, the rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consideration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.

graph LR
    A["Top Channel"] <--> B["Left Channel"]
    C["Bottom Channel"] <--> D["Right Channel"]

055710740
TireRotation

DualRearWheels—IfEquipped

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

graph TD
    A["Top Line"] <--> B["Bottom Line"]
    C["Top Line"] --> D["Bottom Line"]
    E["Bottom Line"] --> F["Bottom Line"]
    G["Bottom Line"] --> H["Bottom Line"]
    I["Bottom Line"] --> J["Bottom Line"]
    K["Bottom Line"] --> L["Bottom Line"]
    M["Bottom Line"] --> N["Bottom Line"]
    O["Bottom Line"] --> P["Bottom Line"]
    Q["Bottom Line"] --> R["Bottom Line"]
    S["Bottom Line"] --> T["Bottom Line"]
    U["Bottom Line"] --> V["Bottom Line"]
    W["Bottom Line"] --> X["Bottom Line"]
    Y["Bottom Line"] --> Z["Bottom Line"]
    AA["Bottom Line"] --> AB["Bottom Line"]
    AC["Bottom Line"] --> AD["Bottom Line"]
    AE["Bottom Line"] --> AF["Bottom Line"]
    AG["Bottom Line"] --> AH["Bottom Line"]
    AI["Bottom Line"] --> AJ["Bottom Line"]
    AK["Bottom Line"] --> AL["Bottom Line"]
    AM["Bottom Line"] --> AN["Bottom Line"]
    AO["Bottom Line"] --> AP["Bottom Line"]
    AQ["Bottom Line"] --> AR["Bottom Line"]
    AS["Bottom Line"] --> AT["Bottom Line"]
    AU["Bottom Line"] --> AV["Bottom Line"]
    AW["Bottom Line"] --> AX["Bottom Line"]
    AY["Top Line"] <--> AZ["Top Line"]
    BA["Top Line"] <--> BB["Top Line"]
    BC["Top Line"] <--> BD["Top Line"]
    BE["Top Line"] <--> BF["Top Line"]
    BG["Top Line"] <--> BH["Top Line"]
    BI["Top Line"] <--> BJ["Top Line"]
    BK["Top Line"] <--> BL["Top Line"]
    BM["Top Line"] <--> BN["Top Line"]
    BO["Top Line"] <--> BP["Top Line"]
    BQ["Top Line"] <--> BR["Top Line"]
    BS["Top Line"] <--> BT["Top Line"]
    BU["Top Line"] <--> BV["Top Line"]
    BW["Top Line"] <--> BX["Top Line"]
    BY["Top Line"] <--> BZ["Top Line"]

TireRotation

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS):

- The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the inner and outer wheel locations can't be switched.

• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and stops.
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed in the instrument cluster.

CAUTION!

• 3500DualRearTiresmayonlyhaveoneapproved directionofrotation.Thisistoaccommodatethe asymmetricaldesign(treadpattern)oftheOn/Off-RoadtireandtheuseofOutlineWhiteLetter(OWL) tires.
• Whenreplacingaflat,thesparetiremayhavetobe remountedontherim,orinstalledatadifferent location,tomaintainthecorrectplacementofthetire onthewheelrelativetothetire/wheelpositionon

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

thetruck. Forexample, if the spare is used to replace an outer reartire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dishedinward. That way the treaddesign of asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

BODYWORK

Protection From Atmospheric Agents

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

596 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
  • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Body And Underbody Maintenance

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Tri-FoldSoftTonneauCoverCare

For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

Preserving The Bodywork

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

- Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterialssuch assteelwoolorscouringpowderthatwillscratch metalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi(8,274kPa) canresultindamageorremovalofpaintanddecals.

BumperCare

The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt using an automotive soap. Bumpers should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.

Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, metalpolishes,orovencleaner. Theseproductsmay damagethebumper'sprotectivefinish.Suchdamage isnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty. Onlycarwashsoap,MoparChromeCleaner,orequivalentisrecommended. Avoidproductsorautomaticcarwashesthatuseacidic solutions,strongalkalineadditives,orharshbrushes. Manyaftermarketcleanersandautomaticcarwashes maydamagethebumper'sprotectivefinish.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.Onlycarwashsoap,MoparChromeCleaner,orequivalentisrecommended.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

598 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Spray-OnBedliner-IfEquipped

During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over time.

To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.

ToHelpMaintainTheAppearanceOfYourSpray-On Bedliner, FollowTheStepsBelow:

1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.

WARNING!

Donotusesilicon-basedprotectionproductstoclean yourbedliner.Silicon-basedproductscanbecomeslipperyandmayresultinpersonalinjury.

Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.

RepairingTheSpray-OnBedliner

While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar Quick Repair Kit.

INTERIORS

Seats And Fabric Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedinclosed areastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

600 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Donot disassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbeltassemblies mustbereplacedafteracollisioniftheyhavebeen damaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

Plastic And Coated Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!

• Directcontactofairfresheners,insectrepellents, suntanlotions,orhandsanitizerstotheplastic, painted,ordecoratedsurfacesoftheinteriormay causepermanentdamage.Wipeawayimmediately.
• Damagecausedbythesetypeofproductsmaynotbe coveredbyyourNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather Parts

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.

CAUTION!

DonotuseAlcoholandAlcohol-basedand/orKetone basedcleaningproductstocleanleatherseats,as damagetheseatmayresult.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

■IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
□Vehicle Identification Number .....605
■BRAKE SYSTEM....605
□Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only (Except Power Wagon)....605

■WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .606

□Torque Specifications....606

■FUEL REQUIREMENTS....608

□3.6L Engine....608

□5.7L Engine....608

□6.4L Engine....609

□Reformulated Gasoline....609

□Materials Added To Fuel....609

□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....610

☐Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .610
□CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..... 6 1 1
□ MMT In Gasoline....611
□ Fuel System Cautions....611
□ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....612

■FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) .....612

□ E-85 General Information .....612

□ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)....612

□Fuel Requirements....613

☐Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .....613

□Starting....614

□Cruising Range....614

□Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

604 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

□Maintenance....614

■FLUID CAPACITIES....615

■FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS....616

□Engine....616

□Chassis....618

IDENTIFICATION DATA

Vehicle Identification Number

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle and seat with an arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)

VehicleIdentificationNumber

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

BRAKE SYSTEM

If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the "Brake Warning Light" and the "ABS Warning Light" (if equipped) during brake use.

Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only (Except Power Wagon)

The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions.

NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

Torque Specifications

LugNut/BoltTorque	LugNut/BoltType	**LugNut/BoltSize	LugNut/BoltSocket Size
130 Ft-Lbs(176 N·m)	Cone M14	× 1.5022 mm
140 Ft-Lbs(190 N·m)	Flanged

**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the washer. Donotoilwheelstuds.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a piston-cranked joint with an arrow indicating force direction (no text or labels)

0322115841US
Two-PieceLugNut

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Diagram showing concentric circular patterns with a central object and an arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 1

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 1
    1 --> 4
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5

0605006372
WheelMountingSurfaceFourAndFiveLugNuts/BoltsTorquePattern

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-way).

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, do nottight enthe lugnuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded "Regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane "Premium" gasoline will not provide any benefit over "Regular" gasoline in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

5.7L Engine

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine.

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane "Plus" gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

6.4L Engine

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine.

This engines is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane

“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent

610 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DONOTuseE-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blendsmay result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emission to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• TheuseofleadedgasolineisprohibitedbyFederal law.Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginem maybeoutoftuneor malfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• Theuseoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentration of methanol. Fuelsystemdamage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuel or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may avoid or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

612 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbonmonoxidepoisoning:

• Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engineer running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithpropermaintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspectedevery timethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormalconditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired,drivewith allsidewindowsfullyopen.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

OnlyvehicleswiththeE-85fuelfillerdoorlabelora yellowgascapcanoperateonE-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanolvaporsareextremelyflammableandcould causeseriospersonalinjury.Neverhaveanysmoking materialslitorproductsthatcancausesparkinornear thevehiclewhenremovingthefuelfillertubecap(gas cap)orfillingthetank.DonotuseE-85asacleaning agentandneveruseitnearanopenflame.

Fuel Requirements

If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87 (R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.

Forbestresults, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.

When switching fuel types:

• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.

NOTE:

• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and rough idle following start up may be experienced even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32^ ( 0^ ).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.

614 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0^ F ( -18^ C). In the range of 0^ F ( -18^ C) to 32^ F ( 0^ C), an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the ambient temperature is less than 32^ F ( 0^ C).

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement Parts

All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Ethanol compatible service components are required.

CAUTION!

Replacingfuelsystemcomponentswithnon-ethanol compatiblecomponentscandamageyourvehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Donotuseethanolmixturegreaterthan85%inyour vehicle.Itwillcausedifficultyincoldstartingandmay affectdrivability.

FLUID CAPACITIES

	U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons	121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
EngineOilWithFilter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts	5.6 Liters
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts	6.6 Liters
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.)	7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
CoolingSystem
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	18.3 Quarts	17.3 Liters

616 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

	U.S.Metric
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuine	Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use	Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 MileFormula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend	you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting therequirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend	you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting therequirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil - 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection - 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection - 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine - If Equipped	87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection - 5.7L/6.4L Engines 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthanspecifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant (antifreeze),mayresultinenginedamageandmay decreasecorrosionprotection.OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolantisdifferentandshouldnot bemixedwithHybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally

CAUTION! (Continued)

compatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecoolingsystem in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,flushed,andrefilledwithfreshOATcoolant (conformingtoMS.90032),byanauthorizeddealeras soonaspossible.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

•Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeradiatorenginecoolantand mayplugtheradiator.

CAUTION!(Continued)

•Thisvehiclehasnotbeendesignedforusewith propyleneglycol-basedenginecoolant(antifreeze).Useofpropyleneglycol-basedenginecoolant(anti-freeze)isnotrecommended.

(Continued)
Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic Use only	Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic with Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)	Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models	We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 619

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear LubricantSAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is not required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 Models	We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MULTIMEDIA

CONTENTS

■UCONNECT SYSTEMS....623
■DRAG & DROP MENU BAR....623
■CYBERSECURITY....624
■UCONNECT SETTINGS....625
□Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
□Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Personal Settings....645
■STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED....665
□Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
□Media Mode....665
□CD Player — If Equipped .....666
■IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .666
■RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .667

□Regulatory And Safety Information....667

■UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS....668

□Introducing Uconnect....668

□Get Started....670

□Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

□Radio....672

□Media....674

□Phone....676

□Voice Text Reply....677

□Climate (4C/4C NAV)....679

□Navigation (4C NAV)....679

□SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped....680

□Register (4C/4C NAV)....681

622 MULTIMEDIA

□Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)....681
□SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Using Do Not Disturb....683
□Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

□Apple CarPlay — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□General Information....686
□Additional Information....686

■CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE....687

UCONNECT SYSTEMS

For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect4C/4CNAVMainMenu

1. Press the "Apps Ⓤ" button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
   The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on the main menu bar.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• Itisnotpossibletoknowortopredictallofthe possibleoutcomesifyourvehicle'ssystemsare breached.Itmaybepossiblethatvehiclesystems, includingsafetyrelatedsystems,couldbeimpaired oralossofvehiclecontrolcouldoccurthatmay resultinanaccidentinvolvingseriousinjuryor death.
• ONLYinsertmedia(e.g.,USB,SDcard,orCD)into yourvehicleifitcamefromattrustedsource.Media ofunknownorigincouldpossiblycontainmalicious software,andifinstalledinyourvehicle,itmay increasethepossibilityforvehiclesystemstobe breached.
• Asalways, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
- Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
- Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to "Data Collection & Privacy" in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement or "Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel".

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

Uconnect3ButtonsOnTheTouchscreenAndButtonsOn TheFaceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3 Personal Settings

Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen (if equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,

Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until the button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow or the "Done" button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN position.

Display

After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.

SettingNameSelectableOptions
DisplayModeAuto Manual
SetLanguageEnglish, Français, Español
TouchscreenBeepOn Off
FuelSaverDisplayOn Off
NOTE:The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Units—IfEquipped

After pressing "Units" on the touchscreen, the following will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
UnitsUS Metric Custom

Voice

After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
VoiceResponseLengthBrief Detailed
ShowCommandListAlways With Help Never

Clock&Date

After pressing the "Clock & Date" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SetTime12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
SetDateUp Arrow	Down Arrow

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the "Safety/Assistance" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ParkSense—IfEquippedSound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:The ParkSense system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
FrontParkSenseChime Volume	Low Med High
RearParkSenseChime Volume—IfEquipped	Low Med High
TiltMirrorsInReverse—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

630 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ParkViewBackupCamera ActiveGuidelines	On Off
NOTE:Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image is displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
ParkViewBackupCamera Delay	On Off
NOTE:When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines is displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
RainSensingAutoWipers —IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.

MULTIMEDIA 631

SettingNameSelectableOptions
HillStartAssist—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.

Lights

After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
HeadlightOffDelay0 sec 30 sec
	60 sec 90 sec
HeadlightIlluminationOnApproach	0 sec 30 sec
	60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
HeadlightsWithWipers—IfEquipped	On Off
AutoDimHighBeams—IfEquipped	On Off

632 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
FlashLightsWithLockOn Off
NOTE:When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.

Doors&Locks

After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AutoDoorLocksOn Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
AutoUnlockOnExitOn Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
SoundHornWithLockOff 1stPress 2nd Press
RemoteDoorUnlockAll Driver

MULTIMEDIA 633

SettingNameSelectable	Options
NOTE:The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
SoundHornWithRemote Start	On Off
NOTE:When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.
MemoryLinkedToFob—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
PassiveEntry—If Equipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.

634 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
FlashLightsWithLockOn Off
NOTE:When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

AutoComfortSystems—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
Auto-OnDriverHeated/Ventilated Seat&SteeringWheelWithVehicle Start—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4°C).When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.

EngineOffOptions

After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
EasyExitSeats—IfEquippedOn Off
HeadlightOffDelay0 sec 30 sec
	60 sec 90 sec
EngineOffPowerDelay0 sec 45 sec
	5 min 10 min

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AutoEntry/Exit—IfEquippedOn Off

Suspension—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Suspension" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SoundHornWithLowerOn Off
FlashLightsWithLowerOn Off

636 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AutoEntry/ExitSuspensionOn Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit.
DisplaySuspensionMessagesAll Warning Only
AutomaticAeroMode(1500Model Only)	On Off
NOTE:When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
TireJackModeOn Off
NOTE:When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
TransportModeOn Off
NOTE:When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
WheelAlignmentModeOn Off
NOTE:The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.

TrailerBrake

After pressing the "Trailer Brake" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TrailerSelectTrailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
TrailerBrakeTypeLight Electric Heavy Electric	Light EOH Heavy EOH

Audio

After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
Balance/FadeFront	Back Left Right
NOTE:The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer+	-
NOTE:When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
SpeedAdjustedVol-ume	Off 1 2 3
NOTE:The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
SurroundSound—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

MULTIMEDIA 639

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AUXVolumeOffset—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.

CompassSettings—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Compass Settings" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectable		Options
Variance1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	1	0	1	1	1	2	1	3
NOTE:Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
PerformCompassCalibration		On Off
NOTE:Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.

0440083509
CompassVarianceZoneMap

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
PairedPhonesList of Paired	Phones
NOTE:The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

SiriusXMSetup—IfEquipped

After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TuneStartOn Off
ChannelSkipList of Channels
NOTE:SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
SubscriptionInfoSirius ID

SettingNameSelectableOptions

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

RestoreSettings

After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
RestoreSettingsYes Cancel
NOTE:When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking “Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.

ClearPersonalData

After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ClearPersonalDataYes Cancel
NOTE:When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.

SystemInformation

After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SystemInformationSystem Software Information Screen
NOTE:When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see an authorized dealer for further information.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Personal Settings

Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN position.

Language

After pressing the "Language" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectable	eOptions
Set Language	English	Français	Español

Display

After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
DisplayModeAuto Manual
NOTE:When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
DisplayBrightnessWith HeadlightsON	+	-
NOTE:To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
DisplayBrightnessWith HeadlightsOFF	+	-
NOTE:To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
SetThemePre-configured Themes
UnitsUS Metric

MULTIMEDIA 647

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TouchscreenBeepOn Off
NavigationTurn-By-Turn InCluster—IfEquipped	On Off
ControlsScreenTime-Out —IfEquipped	On Off
FuelSaverDisplayin Cluster—IfEquipped	On Off

Voice

After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectable	Options
VoiceResponseLengthBrief	Detailed
ShowCommandListNever	w/Help Always

648 MULTIMEDIA

Clock

After pressing the "Clock & Date" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SyncTimeWithGPS—IfEquipped	On Off
SetTimeHours-	+
SetTimeMinutes-	+
TimeFormat12hrs 24hrs
	AM PM
ShowTimeInStatusBar—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.

Camera

After pressing the "Camera" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ParkViewBackupCameraDelayOn Off
NOTE:The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ActiveParkViewBackupCamera Guidelines	On Off
NOTE:The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Safety&DrivingAssistance

After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ParkSenseSound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
FrontParkSenseChime Volume	Low Med High
RearParkSenseChime Volume	Low Med High
TiltSideMirrorsInReverse—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

MULTIMEDIA 651

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ParkViewBackupCamera—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
ParkViewBackupCameraActiveGuidelines—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkViewBackupCameraDelay—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (12 km/h).

652 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
RainSensingAutoWipers—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
TrailerLengthForBlind SpotAlert	Auto Max (36 feet)
HillStartAssist—If Equipped	On Off

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TwoOrFourCornerAir SuspensionModes—If Equipped	Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to an authorized dealer for information.

Mirrors&Wipers

After pressing the "Mirror and Wipers" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
HeadlightswithWipersOn Off

Lights

After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
HeadlightOffDelay+	-
NOTE:When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
HeadlightIlluminationOnApproach	+	-
NOTE:When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.

654 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
HeadlightsWithWipers—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
AutoDimHighBeams—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
FlashLightsWithLockOn Off
NOTE:When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.

Doors&Locks

After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AutoDoorLocks—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
AutoUnlockOnExitOn Off
NOTE:When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
FlashLightsWithLockOn Off
NOTE:When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
SoundHornWithLockOff 1stPress 2nd Press
SoundHornWithRemote Start	On Off

656 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
1stPressOfKeyFobUn-locks	Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
PassiveEntry—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
PersonalSettingsLinkedToKeyFob—IfEquipped	On Off

SettingNameSelectable	eOptions
NOTE:The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.

EngineOffOptions

After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
EngineOffPowerDelay-	+
NOTE:When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
HeadlightOffDelay-	+
NOTE:When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.

658 MULTIMEDIA

SettingNameSelectableOptions
AutoEntry/Exit—IfEquippedOn Off
EasyExitSeat—IfEquippedOn Off
NOTE:When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

AirSuspension—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Suspension" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SoundHornWithLowerOn Off
NOTE:When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote lower button is pushed.
FlashLightsWithLowerOn Off
NOTE:When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob remote lower button is pressed twice. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature selected.

MULTIMEDIA 659

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SuspensionDisplayMessagesAll Warning
AutomaticAeroMode(1500Model Only)	On Off
NOTE:When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
TireJackModeOn Off
NOTE:When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
TransportModeOn Off
NOTE:When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.
WheelAlignmentModeOn Off
NOTE:Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.

Trailer

After pressing the "Trailer Brake" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TrailerSelectTrailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
TrailerBrakeTypeLight Electric Heavy Electric	Light EOH Heavy EOH

Audio

After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
Balance/FadeFront	Back	Left	Right
NOTE:The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer	+		-
NOTE:When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.

MULTIMEDIA 661

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SpeedAdjustedVolume	Off 1 2 3
NOTE:The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
SurroundSound—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUXVolumeOffset—IfEquipped	On Off
NOTE:The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlayOn Off

Phone/BluetoothSettings

After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth Settings" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
DoNotDisturbList of Settings
NOTE:Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
PairedPhonesandAudioDevicesList Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SmartphoneProjectionManagerOn Off

SiriusXMSetup—IfEquipped

After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
TuneStartOn Off

SettingNameSelectableOptions
NOTE:The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
ChannelSkipList of Channels
NOTE:SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
SubscriptionInfoSirius ID
NOTE:New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.

664 MULTIMEDIA

ResetSettings

After pressing the "Reset Settings" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
ResetAppDrawerOK Cancel
RestoreSettingsOK Cancel
NOTE:When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
ClearPersonalDataYes Cancel
NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

SystemInformation

After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SettingNameSelectableOptions
SoftwareLicenseSystem Software Information Screen
NOTE:When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt with a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

SteeringWheelAudioControls(RearviewOfSteering Wheel)

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.)

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

CD Player — If Equipped

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track. If you push the switch up or down three times, it will play the third, etc.

IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.

iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic, iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

CenterConsoleUSB/AUXMediaHub

1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect system.

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.

Uconnect3.0

Uconnect3

Uconnect4C/4CNAV

670 MULTIMEDIA

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in the head-liner and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until afterthe beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.

1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or Send/Receive A Text

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button ⓊSVR. After the beep, say:

• "Cancel" to stop a current voice session
• "Help" to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• "Repeat" to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the top of the touchscreen.

Uconnect3

Please say a command

Tune to AM/FM

Tune to Satellite

Change source to USB / AUX / ...

0415077826

Uconnect3.0

672 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect4C/4CNAV

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button _EVR . After the beep, say:

• "Tunetoninety-five-point-five FM"

• " TunetoSatelliteChannelHits 1"

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button of "in" and say "Help." The system provides you with a list of commands.

0415077826

Uconnect3.0

Uconnect3

MULTIMEDIA 673

Uconnect4C/4CNAV

674 MULTIMEDIA

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button 06VR. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• "ChangesourcetoBluetooth"
• "ChangesourcetoAUX"
• "ChangesourcetoUSB"
• "Play artist Beethoven"; "Play album Greatest Hits"; "PlaysongMoonlight Sonata"; "PlaygenreClassical"

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

graph TD
    A["ABC Jump"] --> B["Play All"]
    B --> C["Song 1"]

0416102327NA
Uconnect3.0

Uconnect3

MULTIMEDIA 675

Uconnect4C/4CNAV

676 MULTIMEDIA

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• "CallJohn Smith"
• "Dial123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts"
• “Redial(call previous outgoing phone number)”
• "Callback(call previous incoming phone number)"

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button 📋 and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."

Please say a command

Listen

Ignore

Call

0701073934

Uconnect3.0

Uconnect3

Uconnect4C/4CNAVPhone

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect announces incomingtext messages. Push the Phone button 📋 and say "Listen." (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say: "Reply."

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINEDVOICETEXTREPLYRESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.	Start without me.	I'll be late.
Okay. Where are you?		I will beminutes late.
Call me.	Are you there yet?
I'll call you later.	I need directions.	See you inof minutes.
I'm on my way.	Can't talk right
I'm lost. Thanks. now.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps:

iPhoneNotificationSettings

1 — Select "Settings"
2 — Select "Bluetooth"
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On "Show Notifications"

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

Climate (4C/4C NAV)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button 06VR. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• "Setdrivertemperatureto70 degrees"
• "Setpassengertemperatureto70 degrees"

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

Uconnect4C/4CNAVClimate

Navigation (4C NAV)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you do not know exactly how to get to where you want to go.

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button of VR. After the beep, say: "Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."

680 MULTIMEDIA

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button of VR. After the beep, say: "Findnearestcoffee shop."

Uconnect4CNAVNavigation

SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped

CAUTION!

SomeSiriusXMGuardianservices,includingSOSCall andRoadsideAssistanceCallwillNOTworkwithout anoperableLTE(voice/data)or3Gor4G(data)networkconnectioncompatiblewithyourdevice.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started.

NOTE:SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, and Canada. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

SOS Call

Theft Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call

Vehicle Health Reports**

Vehicle Health Alert**

Performance Pages Plus**

**If vehicle is equipped.

Register (4C/4C NAV)

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.

2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.

3. Select "Customer Care" to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web.

For further information:

• U.S. residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian
•Canadian residents visit: siriusxm.ca/guardian

Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)

You're only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your car.

MobileApp

682 MULTIMEDIA

To use the Uconnect App:

• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your vehicle's navigation system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.

NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5-day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.

Push the VR button 05VR. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• " Showfuelprices"
• "Show5-dayweatherforecast"
• "Showextendedweather"

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXMTravelLink

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests.

Uconnect4C/4CNAVWith8.4-inchSiriEyesFree Available

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

"I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly."
- Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android's best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the "Microphone" icon within Android Auto, to activate Android's VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone's features:

• Maps
  •Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
  • Additional Apps

AndroidAutoOn8.4-inchDisplay

NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

Refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped

NOTE:Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the "Home" button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone's features:

• Phone
  • Music
• Messages
• Maps
  • Additional Apps

AppleCarPlayOn8.4-inchDisplay

NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply.

Refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Additional Information

© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
- Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)

SiriusXM Guardian services support:

• U.S. residents call:1-844-796-4827

•Canadian residents call:1-877-324-9091

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE....690

□Prepare For The Appointment....690

□Prepare A List....690

□Be Reasonable With Requests .....690

■IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE....690

□FCA US LLC Customer Center .....691

□FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□In Mexico Contact....691

□Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . . . .691

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....692

□Service Contract....692

■WARRANTY INFORMATION....693

■MOPARPARTS .693

■REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS....693

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .693

□In Canada....694

■PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .....694

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.

- If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

In Mexico Contact

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call [phone] English / [phone] French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust(internalcombustionenginesonly), someofitsconstituents,andcertainvehiclecomponentscontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntotheStateof Californiatocausecancerandbirthdefects,orother reproductiveharm.Inaddition,certainfluidscontainedinvehiclesandcertainproductsofcomponent wearcontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntotheStateof Californiatocausecancerandbirthdefects,orother reproductiveharm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.

ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)

INDEX

696 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .....559

Adding Fuel....424

Additives, Fuel....609

Adjust

Down....46,47

Forward....45,47

Rearward....45,47

Up .46,47

Adjustable Pedals 6 1

Air Bag

Air Bag Operation....245

Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Enhanced Accident Response .....256, 525

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....525

If Deployment Occurs .....255

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Maintenance....258

Transporting Pets....285

Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 242, 287

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .542

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Air Conditioner Refrigerant .....544, 545

Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Air Conditioning....100

Air Conditioning Filter .....103, 545

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .....101

Air Filter 542

Air Pressure Tires....580

Air Suspension....354, 360

Alarm Panic....2 Security Alarm....32, 193

Alterations/Modifications Vehicle 6

Android Auto .684

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....559,615 Disposal....561

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....208

Anti-Lock Warning Light....198

Apple CarPlay 685

Ashtray....136

Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Audio Systems (Radio). 623

Auto Down Power Windows....105

Automatic Door Locks. 40

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....101

Automatic Transmission .....307, 567 Adding Fluid .....566, 567

INDEX 697

Fluid And Filter Changes .....567, 568

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565, 566

Fluid Type....565, 618

Shifting.315,324

Special Additives....565

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....312

A u x C o r d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary Switches. 137

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568, 618

Axle Lubrication....568

Back-Up. 421

Back-Up Camera....421

Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System .....370

Battery....194,538

Charging System Light .....194

Keyless Key Fob Replacement 2 2

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Body Builders Guide. 6

Body Mechanism Lubrication....552

B-Pillar Location .575

Brake Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Brake Control System. 209

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564, 618

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 605

Fluid Check....564

Master Cylinder .564

Parking 303

Warning Light....192

Brake/Transmission Interlock....307

Bulb Replacement....464

.666Bulbs, Light....289, 464

Cab Top Clearance Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Camera 421

Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Camper....151

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Caps, Filler Oil (Engine) ..... .534, 540, 541

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .....560

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 612

Cargo Light 7

Car Washes. .596

Cellular Phone....667

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Center Seat Storage Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Change Oil Indicator....177

Changing A Flat Tire....479

Chart, Tire Sizing. .571

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)....204

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .....285

Checks, Safety. .285

Child Restraint....259

Child Restraints Booster Seats....263

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....273

Infant And Child Restraints .....261

Locating The LATCH Anchorages .....269

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .....265

Older Children And Child Restraints .....262

Seating Positions....264

Cigar Lighter....136

Clean Air Gasoline....609

Cleaning Wheels....589

Climate Control 85

Manual 85

Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance.....687

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Contract, Service....692

Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....560

Cooling System....558

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....559

Coolant Capacity 615

Coolant Level....558, 561, 562

Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Drain, Flush, And Refill .....558

Inspection....561,562

Points To Remember....562

Pressure Cap....560

Radiator Cap....560

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....559, 615, 616

Corrosion Protection ....595

Cruise Control (Speed Control) .....404

Cruise Light....201, 202

Cupholders. 131

Customer Assistance....690

Customer Programmable Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Cybersecurity....624

Daytime Running Lights 73

Dealer Service....538

Defroster, Rear Window....85

Defroster, Windshield. 287

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers 83

INDEX 699

Diagnostic System, Onboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Differential, Limited-Slip .....386

Dipsticks Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Disabled Vehicle Towing....521

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....561

Disturb. 683

Door Ajar....195

Door Ajar Light. 195

Door Locks Automatic....40

Doors. 34

Driver's Seat Back Tilt 42

Driving Off-Pavement....372

Off-Road 372

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water....453

Dual Rear Wheels....593,606

E-85 Fuel....612

Electrical Power Outlets .....132

Electric Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Anti-Lock Brake System....208

Electronic Roll Mitigation .....213, 217

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .336, 340, 346, 350

Electronic Range Select (ERS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 320, 330

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)....213

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .....194

Emergency Brake. 303

Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Jacking....479

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Emission Control System Maintenance....204

Engine....534, 535, 536

Air Cleaner 542

Block Heater....302

Break-In Recommendations....303

Compartment....534

Compartment Identification .....534, 535, 536

Coolant (Antifreeze)....616

Exhaust Gas Caution .....286, 612

Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Fuel Requirements....608,615

Jump Starting.513

Oil 539,615,616

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 540, 541

700 INDEX

Oil Filter....541
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539, 615
Oil Synthetic .541
Overheating....516
Starting.297
Engine Oil Viscosity....540, 541
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .....256, 525
Entry System, Illuminated 81
Ethanol....610,612
Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 612
Exhaust System....286,556
Exterior Lights....71,289

Filters

Air Cleaner....542
Air Conditioning....103,545
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541, 616
Engine Oil Disposal .541
Turn Signals....77,201,289
Flash-To-Pass 74
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491, 508
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Flashers

Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Fuel Requirements....612,613

Maintenance....614

Replacement Parts....614

Starting.614

Fluid, Brake 618

Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Fluid Leaks....289

Fluid Level Checks

Brake....564

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Fog Lights....76,467

Fold Flat Load Floor .....126

Fold-Flat Seats 42

Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Four Wheel Drive ....333

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Front Axle (Differential) .568

Fuel....608

Adding .424

Additives....609

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Ethanol....610,612

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

INDEX 701

Flexible....612

Gasoline....608

Light....198

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Methanol....610

Octane Rating....608,616

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608, 615

Tank Capacity....615

Fuses....473

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)....1 1 2

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....425

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Gasoline, Reformulated .....609

Gear Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 325

Gear Selector Override. .517

General Information. 227

Glass Cleaning....601

Grocery Bag Retainer. 57

Gross Axle Weight Rating. 428

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Guide

Body Builders....6

GVWR....425

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water. 453

Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Headlights....466

Automatic....74

Automatic High Beam 73

Cleaning....596

High Beam 73

Passing 74

Switch 71

Head Restraints 57

Heated Mirrors 69

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Hill Descent Control....218

Hill Descent Control Indicator .....218

Hill Start Assist....210

Hitches

Trailer Towing....433

Hoisting....569

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)....1 1 2

Hood Prop....1 1 1

Hood Release....1 1 1

Hub Caps....512

702 INDEX

Ignition....26

Switch....26

Illuminated Entry 81

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) 30

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 459

Instrument Cluster

Descriptions....201

Display....172

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....600

Integrated Trailer Brake Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Interior Appearance Care ....599

Interior Lights. 7 9

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). 83

Introduction....4

Inverter

Power....136

iPod/USB/MP3 Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Jack Location....479,496

Jack Operation....479

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Key Fob

Panic Alarm 21

Programming Additional Key Fobs .....25, 31

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ..... 2 2

Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..... 2 5

Key-In Reminder. 28

Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 297

Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632, 655

Passive Entry 36

Passive Entry Programming .....36, 655

Keys 18

Replacement 31

Sentry (Immobilizer) 30

Lane Change And Turn Signals....7 7

Lane Change Assist....7 7

Latches. 289

Hood 111

Lead Free Gasoline....608

Leaks, Fluid .289

Life Of Tires....583

Light Bulbs....289,464

Lights....81,289

Air Bag....192, 242, 287

Automatic Headlights 74

Automatic High Beam 73

Brake Assist Warning....216

Brake Warning 192

INDEX 703

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Cargo

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Courtesy/Reading....79,80

Cruise....201, 202

Daytime Running 73

Engine Temperature Warning....193

Exterior 289

Fog.76,467

Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Headlights....71

High Beam 73

Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Interior....79,80

Low Fuel....198

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .....195

Park....201

Passing....74

Seat Belt Reminder....191

Security Alarm....193

Service 464

Side Marker 472

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .....221

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Transfer Case....335

7 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466, 468

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 201, 289

Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....193, 201

Limited-Slip Differential .....386, 568

Loading Vehicle. 425

Tires....575

Load Shed Battery Saver Mode....189

Load Shed Battery Saver On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .....189

Locks

Automatic Door 40

Child Protection 40

Power Door 36

Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Lug Nuts....606

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Maintenance Schedule....529

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .195, 204

Manual

Park Release....519

704 INDEX

Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

Manual Transmission

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Lubricant Selection....618

Media Hub....666

Memory Feature (Memory Seats) 4 2

Memory Seat....42, 48

Memory Seats And Radio 42

Methanol....610

Mirrors 63

Electric Powered 6 6

Heated 69

Memory 48

Outside 65

Rearview....63, 64, 459

Trailer Towing 69

Modifications/Alterations

Vehicle 6

Monitor, Tire Pressure System....221

Mopar Parts....693

MP3 Control....666

Multi-Function Control Lever....73

Navigation System (Uconnect GPS)....421

New Vehicle Break-In Period .....303

Occupant Restraints....227

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .....608

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) .....372, 454

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) .....372, 454

Oil Change Indicator....177

Oil Change Indicator, Reset .....177

Oil, Engine....539, 616

Capacity....615

Change Interval 539

Dipstick .....537

Disposal .541

Filter....541,616

Filter Disposal .541

Identification Logo .540

Materials Added To .541

Pressure Warning Light....194

Recommendation....539,615

Synthetic....541

Viscosity....540, 541, 615

Oil Filter, Change....541

Oil Filter, Selection. .541

Oil Pressure Light....194

Onboard Diagnostic System....203

INDEX 705

Operating Precautions....203

Operator Manual Owner's Manual....5

Outside Rearview Mirrors....65

Overdrive....323,331

Overdrive OFF Switch .....323, 331

Overheating, Engine ....516

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) .....694

Paint Care. 595

Panic Alarm 21

Parking Brake....303

ParkSense System, Rear .....408, 415

Passive Entry 36

Pedals, Adjustable....6 1

Personal Settings....184

Pets....285

Pickup Box....138, 140, 155

Placard, Tire And Loading Information .....575

Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....473

Door Locks....36

Inverter....136

Mirrors 6 6

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....132

Seats 45

Sliding Rear Window....107

Steering....402, 403, 404

Sunroof....108

Windows....104

Power Seats Down....46, 47 Forward....45, 47 Rearward....45, 47 Recline....46 Tilt....46, 47 Up....46, 47

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Pretensioners Seat Belts....239

Programmable Electronic Features....184

Radial Ply Tires .581

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....558, 560

Radio Frequency General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 30, 32, 39

Radio Operation....667

Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Ramp Travel Index .372

Rear Axle (Differential) .....568

Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails....150

Rear ParkSense System....408, 415

Rear Seats, Folding 5 5

Reclining Rear Seats 4 4

Recreational Towing. 447

Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....449

Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....451

Reformulated Gasoline....609

Refrigerant....545

Release, Hood 1 1 1

Reminder, Seat Belt .....229

Remote Keyless Entry 20

Panic Alarm....2 1

Programming Additional Key Fobs .....25, 31

Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode....2 9

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . .634

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Replacement Bulbs....464

Replacement Keys 31

Replacement Tires....584

Reporting Safety Defects....693

Restraints, Child .....259

Restraints, Head 57

Rotation, Tires. .591

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....289

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

Safety, Exhaust Gas....286

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Schedule, Maintenance....529

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .....234

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .....239

Seat Belt Reminder .....191

Seat Belts. 228, 286

Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....234

Child Restraints....259

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Extender....238

Front Seat 228,232

Inspection....286

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....232

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....234

Operating Instructions .....232

Pregnant Women....238

INDEX 707

Pretensioners....239
Reminder 229
Seat Belt Extender .....238
Seat Belt Pretensioner....239
Untwisting Procedure .....234
Seat Belts Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Seats. 42, 44, 45, 47
Adjustment....42, 45, 47
Easy Entry 50
Folding Floor....126
Memory 48
Power 45
Rear Folding....42,54,55
Reclining Rear 4 4
Tilting 42
Security Alarm....32,193
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)....616
Sentry Key Key Programming .... 3 1
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 30
Sentry Key Replacement 31
Service Assistance....690
Service Contract 692
Service Manuals 694
Settings, Personal .....184

Shifting....305

Automatic Transmission....307, 315, 324

Transfer Case....335

Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case

Neutral (N)....449

Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case

Neutral (N)....451

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 201, 289

Siri. .683

Sliding Rear Window, Power .....107

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....590

Snow Plow 444

Snow Tires .586

Spare Tires. .586, 587, 588

Spark Plugs....616

Speed Control

Accel/Decel....407

Cancel....407

Resume....407

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Starting .296, 297

Automatic Transmission .....296

Button 26

Cold Weather....302
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Starting And Operating .....297
Starting Procedures....297
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) .....296
Steering
Power....402, 403, 404
Tilt Column 60
Wheel, Heated....60, 61
Wheel, Tilt 60
Steering Wheel Audio Controls....665
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .665
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .....122
Storage, Vehicle .....102, 595
Storing Your Vehicle....595
Stuck, Freeing....520
Sun Roof....108
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 360
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Tailgate....152
Telescoping Steering Column 60
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .....101

Tilt
Down....46,47
Up .46,47
Tilt Steering Column 60
Tip Start....297
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Tire Markings....570
Tires. .289, 579, 586, 594
Aging (Life Of Tires)....583
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Chains 590
Changing.479
Compact Spare .587
Dual....593,606
General Information .....579, 586
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Inflation Pressure 580
Jacking.479
Life Of Tires....583
Load Capacity .575, 576
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .....197, 221
Quality Grading .594
Radial .581
Replacement....584
Rotation....591

INDEX 709

Safety .569, 579
Sizes....571
Snow Tires....586
Spare Tires....586,588
Spinning....582
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tread Wear Indicators .....582
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Tonneau Cover....154, 596
Tonneau Cover Cleaning .....596
To Open Hood. 1 1 1
Torque Converter Clutch....324, 332
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 521
Disabled Vehicle....521
Guide 434
Recreational 447
Weight 434
Towing Behind A Motorhome....447
Traction 453
Traction Control....213
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)....218
Trailer Towing. 427
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Hitches....433

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Mirrors 69

Tips 442

Trailer And Tongue Weight....434

Wiring....441

Trailer Towing Guide....434

Trailer Weight.434

Transfer Case 569

Electronically Shifted .....336, 340, 346, 350

Fluid 618

Transmission. 307

Automatic....307,315,324,565

Fluid 618

Maintenance....565

Shifting. 305

Transporting Pets....285

Tread Wear Indicators .....582

Turn Signals....77,201,466,468

Uconnect

Customer Programmable Features .....634

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625, 632, 634, 655

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .36, 632, 655

Passive Entry Programming .....36, 632, 655

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .....594

Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). ..... 1 1 2

Universal Transmitter....1 1 2

Unleaded Gasoline....608

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....234

U S B....666

Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .....605

Vehicle Loading....425,576

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. 6

Vehicle Storage....102,595

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540, 541

Voice Command....668

Voice Recognition System (VR) .....668

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions)....196

Warnings And Cautions 5

Warranty Information....693

Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 537

Washing Vehicle....596

Water

Driving Through 453

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .....589

Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Winch....386

Accessories 389

Operation .390

Rigging Techniques....401

Usage. 386

Wind Buffeting....107, 109

Window Fogging. 102

Windows....104

Power 104

Reset Auto-Up .....106

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Windshield Washers....82, 83, 537

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 537

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Windshield Wipers 82

Wipers Blade Replacement....553

Wipers, Intermittent 83

Wipers, Rain Sensitive 8 4

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connections should not be fused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedonthe roofotherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeused inmountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmay affecttheaccuracyoroperationofthecompasson vehiclessoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure a low standing wave ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

All installation should be checked for possible interference between the communication equipment and the vehicle's electronics systems.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Tominimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, donotidyle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. Formoreinformation goto www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

RAM

18DS-126-AE

©2018 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

RAM IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.

FIFTH EDITION REV 2 PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.